Karnataka University BED Syllabus

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 126

 
KARNATAK UNIVERSITY
 

DHARWAD

REGULATIONS AND SYLLABUS


For
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION 
 

TWO YEAR B.Ed. COURSE 
 
(Semesterised and CBCS Scheme) 
(CHOICE BASED CREIDIT SCHEME AND FOUR SEMESTER COURSE)

 
 
Prepared as per NCFTE and NCTE Recommendations and CBCS
Opted by Karnatak University, Dharwad
 
 
With Effect From 
2015‐2016 and Onwards 
 

 
KARNATAK UNIVERSITY

DHARWAD

FACULTY OF EDUCATION

REGULATIONS
OF
BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (B.ED.)
CHOICE BASED CREIDIT SCHEME (CBCS) AND FOUR SEMESTER COURSE
WITH EFFECT FROM 2015-2016 AND ONWARDS
1. Preamble

The Bachelor of Education programme, generally known as B.Ed. is a


professional course that person teaches for upper primary or middle
level (Classes VI-VIII), Secondary Level (Classes IX&X) and Senior
Secondary Level (Classes XI, XII).
1.1 Vision for Teacher-Education
Teacher-education must become more sensitive to the emerging
demands of the school system. For this it must prepare the teacher
for the role of being an:
• encouraging, supportive and humane facilitator in teaching–learning
situation to enable learners (students) to discover their talents, realise
their physical and intellectual potentialities to the fullest, and to
develop character and desirable social and human values needed to
function as responsible citizens; and
• active member of a group of persons who makes a conscious effort
for curricular renewal so that it is relevant to the changing societal
needs and the personal needs of learners.
1.2 Features of Teacher Education:
To be able to realise this vision, teacher-education must comprise the
following features to enable student-teachers to
• understand the way learning occurs and to create plausible situations
Conducive to learning;
• view knowledge as personal experience constructed in the shared
Context of teaching–learning, rather than embedded in the external
Reality of textbooks;
• be sensitive to the social, professional and administrative contexts in

 
which they need to operate;
• develop appropriate competencies to be able to not only seek the
abovementioned understanding in actual situations, but also to create
them;
• attain a sound knowledge base and proficiency in language;
• identify their own personal expectations, perceptions of self,
capacities and inclinations;
• Consciously attempt to formulate one’s own professional orientation
as a teacher in situation-specific contexts;
• View appraisal as a continuous educative process;
• develop an artistic and aesthetic sense in children through art
education;
• address the learning needs of all children, including those who are
marginalised and disabled;
• To pursue an integrated model of teacher-education for
strengthening the professionalization of teachers;
• develop the needed counselling skills and competencies to be a
‘facilitator’ for and ‘helper’ of children needed specific kinds of
help in finding solutions for day-to-day problems related to
educational, personal and social situations; and
• learn how to make productive work a pedagogic medium for
acquiring knowledge in various subjects, developing values and
learning multiple skills.
1-3 Objectives and Duration of the Course: 
1.3.1 On completion of the course the Student-Teacher will be able to: 
i. Develop among teachers a clear understanding of the psychology of
their students.
ii. Enable them to understand the process of socialization.
iii. Develop in them an understanding of the principles of pedagogy,
curriculum development, its transaction and evaluation.
iv. Enable them to make pedagogical analysis of the subjects they are to
teach at the secondary stage.
v. Develop the skills for guidance and counseling.
vi. Enable them to foster creative thinking among pupils for the
reconstruction of knowledge.
vii. Acquaint them with the factors and forces (within the school and
outside) affecting educational system and class room situation.
viii. Acquaint them with educational needs of special groups of pupils.
ix. Enable them to utilize community resources as educational inputs.
x. Develop communication skills and to use the modern information
technology.

 
xi. Enable them to undertake action research and use innovative
practices.
xii. Foster in them a desire for life-long learning.
1.3.2 B.Ed. course is of Four-Semesters and Choice Based Credit Scheme (CBCS) /
Two year of Four Semester duration. Each semester shall extend over a
period of 16 weeks.
1.3.3 The intake of students shall be as notified by the NCTE, State
Government and the University.
2.0 Eligibility Criteria for Admission:
2.1 Candidates who have obtained any Bachelor’s Degree / Master Degree of
this University or of any other University recognized as equivalent by
UGC.
a. Provided that the minimum marks, excluding the Internal marks and
the marks obtained in class examinations for the purpose of
qualification specified above shall be;
i. 45% of marks in the aggregate of three years of study in respect of
candidate belonging to SC/ST, Physically Challenged and Cat-I
candidates.
ii. 50% of marks in the aggregate of three years of study in respect of
the other candidates.
b. Candidates of other Universities seeking admission to B.Ed. course of
Karnatak University should necessarily attach the Eligibility
Certificate issued by Karnatak University without which their
applications shall be rejected.
c. Provided further, that candidates suffering from disability exceeding
75 percent are not eligible for selection under these rules.
2.2 In all Colleges of Education admission of candidates shall be made in
accordance with the Government orders issued from time to time in
respect of (a) reservations and (b) quota for Non-Karnataka students and
any other special categories and in respect of any other aspect having a
bearing on admissions.
2.3 Selection of subjects for Pedagogy of school Subjects
2.3.1 The College shall not provide admission to the candidates who desire to
opt for subjects, which the college has no provision to teach.
2.3.2 For being eligible for admission to B.Ed. course of Karnatak
University.
(i) The two elective or equivalent studied should be those which will be
offered as Pedagogy of School Subject (POSS-I & POSS-II).


 
2.3.3 No candidate shall be permitted to offer more than one language
under special Pedagogy of School Subject unless he or she has studied
both languages for at least 200 marks each at the graduate level. While
selecting so the selection should be such that the two fall under different
categories viz., Modern Indian Classical and Foreign Language
categories.
2.3.4 If the the candidate is not studied school subjects during there degree
course he/she has to select the Content Component Course. (Refer 13.1.1)
2.3.5 In those college which offer Marathi/Urdu or both as POSS students be
permitted to undertake practice teaching in other Pedagogy of school
subject through Marathi/Urdu as medium of instruction provided that (i)
the candidate has offered that language as the medium of instruction at
the SSLC Examination and (ii) guidance is provided by a teacher
educator of the college or a Secondary school teacher teaching the
particular subject possessing either B.A./B.Sc., M.Ed., or
M.A./M.Sc/M.Com/M.C.A. & M.Ed. qualifications. However if trained
teachers with above qualifications are not available, then trained teachers
with a minimum of 5 years of experience in the concerned subject shall
be permitted to guide. In such cases, colleges shall necessarily obtain
prior permission from the University by submitting all relevant records
pertaining to the students and teacher educators/secondary
schoolteachers.
2.4 Fair Distribution of Seats Among Pedagogy of School Subjects:
The number of students to be admitted under special Pedagogy of School
Subject shall normally be distributed across reservation categories such
that 50% belong to Humanities and 50% to Science and Mathematics.
Marginal adjustment to the above mentioned distribution may be
permitted by the University to the extent of 15%, provided teaching
facilities are available in the college.
2.5 Intake:
Each College of Education shall adhere to the intake fixed by the
Government, NCTE and the University periodically. Their shall be basic
Unit of 50 Students with maximum of Two Units. If the
college/Department wishes to have Two Units subject to the approval of
NCTE and University.
3.0 Medium of Instruction:
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English or Kannada.
4.0 Attendance:


 
4.1 Each semester shall be taken as a unit for purpose of calculating
attendance
4.2 A student enrolled in the B.Ed. programme shall be deemed to have
satisfied the requirement of attendance if he/she has attended not less
than 80% of the total number of working days, which include
lectures, seminars, practice teaching and practical work undertaken
together during each semester.
4.3 The minimum attendance of student-teacher shall have to be 80% for all
course work and practicum, and 90% for school internship.
5.0 Shortage of Attendance:
5.1 Shortage of attendance to the extent of 10% may be condoned by the
Vice-Chancellor on the recommendations of the Principal of the
College provided the Principal Certifies that the reasons furnished by the
student for not complying with the attendance requirement are genuine.
There shall not be, however, any condonation where the attendance is less
than 70%.
5.2 Students who do not satisfy the prescribed attendance requirements
shall not be eligible to appear for the ensuing examination. Such
candidates may keep fresh terms by again enrolling themselves for the
course following the rules of the University.
6.0 Scheme of Instruction:
6.1 In the First Semester there shall be Seven Papers (Five Core Papers +
Two Pedagogy of School Subject, EPC-1 Reading and Reflecting on
Texts and to Engagement with Field Work Microteaching and School
Observation Demonstration by Pedagogy Teacher Education One and
Two).
In the Second Semester there shall be Six Papers (Four Core Paper, Two
Pedagogy of School Subject, EPC-II Drama and Art Education, Practice
Teaching Four Lesson in each POSS and Practicum related and
Engagement With Field work.
In the Third Semester, there shall be Five Papers (Five Core Papers)
In the Fourth Semester there shall be One paper (EPC-III Understanding
Self and School Internship Program for the period of 16-18 weeks.
(Vide Annexure-II).
6.2 Every college shall offer atleast Four Optional Course in the Third
Semester. Student has to select any one optional course of their choice.
7.0 Hours of Instruction (Contact Hours) Per Week:


 
7.1 Working Days
(a) There shall be atleast two hundred working days each year exclusive of
the period of examination and admission.
(b) The institution shall work for a minimum of thirty six hours in a
week of six days, during which physical presence in the institution of all
the teachers and student teachers in necessary to ensure their availability
for advice, guidance, dialogue and consultation as and when needed.
(c) The minimum attendance of student-teachers shall have to be 80% for all
course work & practicum and 90% for School Internship.
7.2 Practice Teaching related activities shall be completed within Three
weeks in second semester. The practice teaching related activates can be
extended Middle Level (Classes VI - VIII), Secondary Level (Classes IX-
X) and Senior Secondary Level (Classes XI-XII), as per the preamble of
the NCTE Guide.
8.0 Practice Teaching:
8.1 Each student shall practice teaching by giving Four Lessons in each
subject of Pedagogy of School offered in relation to POSS-I and
POSS-II in a Recognized Schools/Attached Practice Schools/Co-
Operative Schools/ Govt. Schools of Middle Level, Secondary Level
and Senior Secondary Level for period of about Three weeks or as a
spread over programme during the Second semester.
a) The College Staff/Teacher Educator supervises and shall check all the
Lesson Plans, the lesson shall be fully observed, assessed and marks
recorded by them on the spot-followed by a feedback discussion session
with the student-teachers. In the case of non-availability of College Staff
Supervisors, the same may be done by the concerned subject teacher for
the school appointed by the Principal of the College.
b) Assessment for teaching practice on POSS-I and POSS- II shall be based
on quality of lesson plans written and student-teacher performance in 4
practice lessons in each subject and related teaching and learning aids
used during the lesson in actual classrooms and in Microteaching and
Innovative Teaching under simulated conditions (One Lesson).

8.2 Each student teacher shall fully observe a minimum 16 lessons per
subject of teaching practice out of which, Eight lessons may be of the
same subject and Eight may be of the other subject and attend the
feedback session held by the supervising staff these student teachers shall
maintain proper records of lessons observation in a prescribed proforma.


 
8.3 Each student shall undergo training in microteaching in simulated
condition using at least any three of the following skills in each POSS
without overlap. The student shall submit the lesson notes to the
concerned supervisor.
(A) Writing Instructional Objectives, (ii) Introducing the Lesson, (iii)
Explanation, (iv) Illustrating with Examples, (v) Questioning, (vi) Using
Black Board, and (vii) Stimulus Variations
8.4 Each student-teacher shall undergo training in innovative teaching
under simulated condition.
8.5 Each student-Teacher shall submit the internal assessment records of all
the assignments as detailed in 9.0 for the concerned semester.
9.0 Internal Assessment:
Internal Assessment Components and Marks:
In case of all Theory Papers, the internal assessment shall be for 20
theory marks, assessed through a test of 10 marks and one
assignment/semester for 10 marks.
Theory-I Semester
Paper Test Assignment/Sem Total Marks
(1)* inar(1)*
Marks Marks
S1 Course 1 Child & Growing Up 10 10 20

S1 Course 2 Language Across the 10 10 20


Curriculum
S1 Course 3 Understanding Discipline & 10 10 20
Subject
S1 Course 4 Skills and Strategies of 10 10 20
Teaching
S1 Course 5 POSS-I 10 10 20

S1 Course 6 POSS-II 10 10 20

S1 EPC – 1 Reading and Reflecting on Grade Grade A/B/C/D/E


Texts

Note: Each test shall be one hour long conducted for a maximum of 20 marks and later reduced to 10 marks.
• Figure in parentheses indicates the number of tests and assignments
• POSS: Pedagogy of School Subject.
* Please See Appendix – I for the Details of the EPC – I; Reading and Reflecting on Tex

Theory-II Semester
Paper Test (1)* Assignment/Semin Total Marks
Marks ar(1)*
Marks
S2 Course 7 Learning and 10 10 20
Teaching
S2 Course 8 Knowledge & 10 10 20
Curriculum-I
S2 Course 9 Assessment for 10 10 20


 
Learning
S2 Course 10 Educational 10 10 20
Technology
S2 Course 11 POSS-I 10 10 20
S2 Course 12 POSS-II 10 10 20
S2 EPC – II Drama & Art In Grade Grade A/B/C/D/E
Education
Note: Each test shall be one hour long conducted for a maximum of 20 marks and later reduced to 10 marks.
• Figure in parentheses indicates the number of tests and assignments
• POSS: Pedagogy of School Subject.

* Please See Appendix – II for the Details of the EPC – II Drama & Art In Education

Theory-III Semester
Paper Test (1)* Assignment/ Total
Marks Seminar (1)* Marks
Marks
S3 Course -13 Gender, School and Society 10 10 20
S3 Course-14 Creating an Inclusive School 10 10 20
S3 Course-15 Critical Understanding (ICT) 10 10 20
S3 Course-16 Knowledge and Curriculum-II 10 10 20
S3 Course-17 Contemporary India & Education 10 10 20

S3 course-18 Optional Course (any one) 10 10 20


Work Education/ Peace
Education/ Value Education/
Guidance & Counseling/
Health & Physical Education/
Special Education/
ActionResearch/Environmenta
l Education)
Note: Each test shall be one hour long conducted for a maximum of 20 marks and later reduced to 10 marks.
• Figure in parentheses indicates the number of tests and assignments
• POSS: Pedagogy of School Subject.

Theory-IV Semester
Paper Grade Assignment/ Total Marks
Seminar (1)*
Marks
S4 Practicum-I Internship On POSS – I (125+25) 150
+ Project Work – I
S4 Practicum-II Internship On POSS – (125+25) 150
II + Project Work – II
Practical Exam POSS – I & II (50+50) 100

S4 EPC – III Understanding Self A/B/C/D/E

Note: Each test shall be one hour long conducted for a maximum of 20 marks and later reduced to 10 marks.
• Figure in parentheses indicates the number of tests and assignments
• POSS: Pedagogy of School Subject.

10 
 
* Please See Appendix – III for the Details of Internship and EPC–III
Understanding and Self
(B) Practice Teaching
The activities and the allotment of marks for Practice Teaching in each
Pedagogy of Schools Subjects are as follows:
Sl. Particulars Semester -I Semester – II Semester – III Semester – IV
No. Marks Marks
-----
1 Micro Teaching 50
Under Simulated (5x3x2) ---- ----- ---- ----- -----
Conditions
(3 Skills Without
overlapping)
2 Lesson Planning (4 Lessons) (2 (16 Lessons) 4
---- Best Lessons 20+5 Best + the 40
to be (5x2 x2) Criticism (5X4X2)
Considered Lesson to be
for Considered for
Evaluation) Evaluation)

3 Lesson Teaching (4 Lessons) (2 (16 Lessons) 4


---- Best Lessons 20+5 Best + the 40 -----
to be (5x2 x2) Criticism (5X4X2)
Considered Lesson to be
for Considered for
Evaluation) Evaluation)

4 Innovative Teaching ---- ----


(simulated) ---- One Lesson 20
1. Model of Teaching (10X2)
or
2.IntegratingTechnol
ogy in Teaching
5 Unit Plan ---- ---- ---- 20
---- (10x2)

6 Resource Unit/ ---- ---- ----


Instructional Kit/ ----- 30
Work Book/ Working (15x2)
Models*

7 Construction of ---- ---- ----


Achievement Test ---- 30
(30 items) (15x2)

8 Administration of ---- ---- ----


Achievement Test ---- 10
and Interpretation of (5X2)
Test Scores

9 Observation Record ---- ---- ---- ----


(Minimum of 30 10
Lessons) (5X2)

Total 50 ---- 50 ---- 100 100

(C) Community Orientation and Co-Curricular Activities

11 
 
In addition to the above practice teaching components, each student teacher
shall participate/ undertake the following activities and submit a report in
respect of each item: In the Third semester
9.1.1 Socially Useful Productive Work (SUPW) - during the fouth semester
9.1.2 Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) - during the fourth semester
9.1.3 Physical Education/ Games (PE/G) - during the fouth semester
9.1.4 Citizenship Training Camp (CTC) : The CTC should aim at fostering
qualities like Working with Community, Collective Work, Co-Operative
Living, Fellow Feeling, like-minded towards rural culture etc. among student
teachers. The college shall arrange to have such activities in CTC that foster the
above orientations. The CTC should exclusively be conducted at a rural
place/outskirt city by the college during the Second Semester.
These activities shall be graded as A, B, C, D, and E and the grades
for these activities shall be shown in the marks card. The grade elaboration is as
follows:
A – Excellent, B – Good, C – Average, D – Fair and E – Poor.
9.2 The college shall submit to the University all the internal assessment
marks pertaining to theory and practicum as detailed in 9.0 above to the
University as and when it is called for.
9.3 Internal assessment
9.3.1. The internal assessment marks shall be based on attendance, tests,
seminars, assignments and practical/practicum/Activities.
9.3.2. The internal assessment marks shall be communicated to the Registrar
(Evaluation) within 15 days at the end of the each semester.
9.3.3. A candidate shall register for all the papers of a semester when he/she
appears for the examination of that semester for the first time.
9.3.4. Conduct of Practical Examination: the University shall conduct Practical
Examination with the help of “Practical Examination Boards” approved
by the Chairman, Board of Examiners. Each practical Examination Board
shall consist of two members i.e., one from the B.Ed. College and the
other from Practicing School.
9.4 Practical Examination
a. The University shall conduct practical examination in teaching one
lesson in each of the subjects of practice teaching offered by the student-
teacher under POSS-I and POSS-II at the end of the fourth semester. Each
lesson shall be observed fully and assessed by two examiners, preferably
one internal and other external chosen on the basis of their special
knowledge of the subject.
b. The final result shall take into account the performance of the student
in I, II, III and IV Semesters assessed both internally and externally by
allotting credit points semester wise .

12 
 
Eligibility to take the Examination
b. A candidate shall appear at the final examination if he/she satisfactorily
completes, besides fulfilling all other conditions under regulation of
this syllabus, the following additional work also and has maintained
proper records.
i. Participation in the Co-Curricular Programmes, SUPW, Health and
Physical Education Activities Organized by the College.
ii. Participation in Fieldtrip, such as visit to School/Schools, Science
Slubs/Museums and the like Model Institutions.
iii. Participation in Seminars-Symposia/Programmes organized by the
college for professional advancement.
iv. Internal assessment in respect of 9.0 (c) above shall be in a form of
assigning grades from A (Highest) through B, C, D, or E (Lowest).
There will be no minimum grade for pass to be obtained. However, the
Grade obtained by the student shall be recorded in the marks card.
c. The College shall submit to the University all the internal
assessment marks pertaining to theory and practicum as details in
above to the University a week before the commencement of the
theory examination.
10.0 The Co-Ordination Board:
A Board for Co-ordination and moderation of internal assessment may
be appointed in the beginning of the every academic year, for (i)
assessing and ensuring the relevance, range and quality of work and its
assessment (ii) moderating and regulating the range and distribution of internal
assessment in all papers including teaching practice and every subject related
activites for the first semester &third semester similarly second semester &
fourth semester in relation to the quality of the work turned out, suitably scaling
up or down the whole set of marks in any area.
10.1 The Board shall consists of – (Each Board)
1. Dean of the Faculty of Education as Chairman of the Board.
2. Each Board consists of Two Senior Principal with a minimum of 15
years of Teaching experience in a College of Education under the
jurisdiction of Karnatak University, Dharwad.
3. The Principal of the B.Ed. colleges which the board is visiting.
4. Each Board consists of a Senior faculty with a minimum of 15 years of
Teaching experience in a College of Education under the jurisdiction of
Karnatak University, Dharwad.
5. In the event of members appointed under (2) and (4) failing to attend
the Board, the Chairman may be authorized to Co-Opt a senior member
from the affiliated Colleges of Education.

13 
 
6. In the event of the number of Colleges of Education increasing beyond
20, a second Co-Ordination Board shall be constituted with the Dean of
the Faculty of Education, Karnatak University. Further, the board
consists of new members from (2), (3) and (5) categories.
10.2 Guidelines
10.2.1 .The University shall receive the consolidated Internal Assessment
marks lists (in duplicate) from each college within 15 days of the end
of the each semester. The Individual colleges shall also submit the
required descriptive statistics i.e. Frequency distribution, Mean, for (i)
Total Internal Assessment (ii) Individual papers and (iii) Practice
Teaching as directed by the Coordination Board.
10.2.2 The Co-ordination Board shall meet at the University in the 1st
instance to scrutiny the internal assessment marks of each college.
10.2.3 The proportion of students who are above the theoretical average
(50%) given an indication of the extent of liberalism in internal
assessment.
10.2.4 The range of marks assigned by the college indicates the extent of
discrimination in evaluation of student performance in respect of
quality of work, if either the range is too narrow, or the distribution is
lop-sided, the Co-ordination Board shall take appropriate steps to
moderate.
10.2.5 The range of marks for each College of Education in respect of
internal assessment for the college as a whole should be between 65%
to 90% and the college mean should be between 70% to 80%. The
Co-Ordination Board shall review the assignments submitted by the
students and their assessment pattern and would examine whether the
range of marks of a College of Education is between 65% to 90% and
the mean score of the college is between 70% to 80% as stipulated.
10.2.6 The Co-Ordination Board shall visit the colleges at the end of the
every first semester &third semester similarly second semester &
fourth semester after the initial meeting at the University.
10.2.7 The Principal of the college shall submit a fair copy of the moderated
consolidated marks lists incorporating the directions of the
Coordination Board duly signed to the Registrar (Evaluation), with a
copy of the Chairman of the Co-ordination Board.
10.2.8 The Co-Ordination Board also should ensure that the Evaluation is
done based on the performance of the student and record submitted
them. The Co-Ordination Board shall identify 10 to 15% of the
students, assignments selected at random from the two extreme and
middle groups after each semester examination.
10.2.9 The deliberations of the Co-ordination Board and the records
submitted by the Colleges shall be treated as CONFIDENTIAL.

14 
 
10.2.10 In the instance of any malpractice coming to the knowledge of the
Co-ordination Board, the matter will be reported to the University for
Appropriate Action.
10.2.11 The decision of the Co-ordination Board shall be final.

11.0 Scheme of Examination:


11.1 There shall be a University Examination at the end of each semester
and except Third semester.
11.1.1 Scheme of studies and examination of the B.Ed. Course (vide
Annexure II)
11.2 The composition of theory and internal assessment for each paper
shall be 80 and 20 marks respectively.
11.3 Practical Examination
a) The University shall conduct practical examination in teaching one
lesson in each of the subjects of Pedagogy of School offered by the
student under POSS-I and POSS-II at the end of the Second Semester.
Each lesson shall be observed fully and assessed by two examiners,
preferably one internal and other external chosen on the basis of their
special knowledge of the subject.
b) The final result shall take into account the performance of the student
in all I, II, III and IV Semesters assessed both internally and
externally.
12.0 Theory Examination :
a) Question Paper Pattern
Pattern of Question Papers for B.Ed. Course-1 to Course-17 of Four
Semester First, Second, Third & Fourth Semester.
Section No. of Questions Marks Total Nature of Objectives to be
to be Answered Per Marks Covered
Question
A 12 Questions out 5 60 Knowledge/Comprehension/
of 15 questions to Comprehension type question.
be answered Each should answer in not
more than one page.

B 2 Questions with 5 20 Application, Analysis,


internal choice Synthesis, Evaluation type
questions Each should be
answered in about 2 to 3 pages
Total 80

b) Board of Examiners and Valuation:

15 
 
i. There shall be Board of Examiners for scrutinizing and approving the
question papers.

c) Classification of Successful Candidates:


i. Minimum for a pass at the University Examination in each of the
Theory papers/ Practical shall be 35% and minimum for a pass in
each paper including internal assessment shall be 40% and 50% in
aggregate for all the papers in each semester.
ii. For the purpose of declaring Ranks and Classes the aggregate of the
marks in both the semesters shall be taken into account. However,
Ranks shall not be declared in case the candidate has not successfully
completed each of the papers in the first attempt.
iii. Successful candidates who secure the minimum marks stipulated
above in all papers in one attempt in both the semesters shall be
classified as follows:
• First Class with Distinction: 70 percent and above in both theory and
practicum paper separately as well as in aggregate.
• First Class: 60 percent and above, but below 70 percent in both theory
and practicum taken separately as well as in aggregate.
• Second Class: 50 percent and above, but below 60 percent in aggregate in
both theory and practicum.
• Third Class: 40 percent and above, but below 50 percent in the aggregate.
• The result for the each semester should be declared in the form of credit
points earned by the students semesterwise. That is Semester Grade Point
Average (SGPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA). (Please
refer 27.0 for the detailed calculation.)

d) Provision for Repeaters


i. A candidate is allowed to carry all the previous uncleared papers to the
subsequent semester provided he/she has satisfactorily fulfilled the
attendance requirements prescribed.
ii. The B.Ed. programme under CBCS is fully carryover system. A
candidate re-appearing the odd or even semester examinations as and
when they are conducted. (Even semester examinations in Even
semester and Odd semester examinations in Odd semester.)
iii. Candidates who have failed/ remained absent or are opting for
improvement in any paper/s shall complete their course within a
maximum period of three years from the date of admission. However,
the marks secured in the previous attempt shall be retained, if the
same is higher, even after appearing for improvement. Further there
is no provision for improvement in the Practice Teaching University
Examination.

16 
 
iv. The candidate shall take the examination as per the syllabus and scheme
of examination in force during the subsequent appearances.
v. Claim of Exemption: Candidates who fail in the B.Ed. examination may
claim exemption at their option at subsequent attempts in the subjects in
which they have obtained 40 percent or more. Such candidates who pass
in subsequent attempts however will not be eligible for a class;
scholarship etc.The internal assessment once awarded for a paper shall
be retained even if the candidate takes the theory/ practical examination
in that paper subsequently.
vi. There is no provision for improvement of internal assessment.
12.1 Miscellaneous
A. The Directions, Orders, Notifications issued by the University
Authorities in respect of matters not covered by these Regulations
shall be final, provided they are in conformity with the provisions
of the Karnataka State Universities Act, 2000 and the Ordinances,
Statutes, Regulations and Rules made there under.
B. Not with standing anything contained in these regulations, the
semester system at Post-Graduate level is is hereby repealed.
C. The provisions of any order, Rules or Regulations in force shall
be in applicable to the extent of its inconsistency with these
Regulations.
D. The University shall issue such orders, Instructions,
procedures and prescribe such format as it may deem fit to
implement the provisions of this Regulations.
E. The procedural details may be given by the University from
time to time.
F. Any unforeseen problems/difficulties may be resolved by the
Vice Chancellor, whose decision in the matter shall be final.
13.0 Additional Clause for Content Component Courses for Bachelor
of Education (B.Ed.) Semester Course 2013-2014 and Onwards
13.1 The Content Component Course (C.C.C.) shall be made exemption or
compulsory as under keeping in view the Government Orders of the
past and present and convention of the University, being followed
while allotting POSS-I and POSS-II respectively Content Component
Course Subject in the First Semester and Second Semester Only.
13.1.1 Eligibility Criteria for Selection of Content Component
13.1.2 Candidates who have obtained any Bachelor’s Degree of the
University or of any other University recognized as equivalent thereto

17 
 
with any one language and at least two subjects of three electives
specified below during all three years of course of study.
Languages: English, Kannada, Hindi, Marathi, Urdu, Sanskrit.
Electives: Physics, Chemistry, Botany, Zoology, Mathematics,
History, Political Science, Sociology, Geography, Economics,
English, Kannada, Hindi, Marathi, Urdu, Sanskrit.
If the candidates studied above said subjects then they may be
exempted from the study of content component course subject.
13.1.3 Candidates who offer a language as one of the (POSS) to be treated as
equivalent in the list of Languages: English, Kannada, Hindi, Marathi,
Urdu, and Sanskrit.
Electives: Physics, Chemistry, Botany, Zoology, Mathematics,
History, Political Science, Sociology, Geography, Economics,
English, Kannada, Hindi, Marathi, Urdu, Sanskrit, shall have
studied the language for a paper of atleast 200 marks either as basic
or compulsory or even without a specific nomenclature during their
any Graduation Course. They are exempted from the study of
Content Component Course Subject.
13.2 If the candidate has not studied school teaching subjects as option at
Bachelor Degree level for all the three years/ two years at P.G. level,
then candidate has to select one or two Content Component Course as
per the syllabus prescribed by the University and write an
examination conducted by the University and also study the Pedagogy
of school subject in the same subject for the B.Ed. course (as per
Government Order CAC/3/B.Ed.2013-14 dated 19.11.2013)
13.3 Any candidate who has not studied optional subject for all the three
years at Any Bachelor Degree should take Content Component
Course Subject(s) along with candidate has to study two Pedagogy of
School Subject (POSS).
13.4 Subject(s) studied as Content Component Course at B.Ed. will not be
considered as equivalent to Major/Optional subject in Bachelor’s
Degree/ P.G. Level.
13.5 The Content Component Course Subject(s) prescribed at B.Ed. is only to
facilitate the candidates to pursue B.Ed. programme.
14.0 Provided that candidates who have obtained any degree from
recognized Universities situated in Karnataka or outside the Karnataka
State should have studied at least two electives specified above in

18 
 
16.2.1 & 16.2.2 at their three years Degree course of study by
appearing for one subject in the University Examinations for atleast
two years and in the principal subjects for at least three years only and
if there is any change of subject during the course of study of three
years. Such candidates shall select and shall be allotted two or one
Content Component Course Subject(s) which depends on subject
combination of their graduation course.
15.0 The students of any degree who have studied school subjects or
related school subjects for a period of three years and also languages
as a basic for a period of two years at the degree level may be
exempted from the study of content component course subject.
17.0 Students of any degree who have not studied either school subjects or
related school subjects for a period of three years or the language as a
basic for a period of two years at the any degree level shall be made
compulsory to study two or one Content Component Course
Subject(s) which depends on the subject combinations during their
three years degree course.
18.0 Students who are allotted Content Component Course Subject(s), they
have to be undergone University Examinations for each Content
Course Subject(s) of 50 maximum marks and should obtain 20 marks
minimum for passing at the end of each semester. There is no Internal
Assessment Marks for Content Component Course Subject(s).
19.0 Students, who are allotted Content Component Course Subject(s), have to
study compulsorily along with two Pedagogy of School Subject
(POSS) in respective subjects.
20.0 Content Component Course Subject(s) marks shall not be included for the
percentage calculation of B.Ed. Semester-wise University Examinations.
21.0 The Content Component Course Subject(s) shall not be compulsory for
both Pedagogy of School Subject. However, it shall be either both
methods or one method depending upon the subjects studied at three
years degree level as per the above said/mentioned norms.
22.0 Students who are allotted Content Component Course Subject(s) which
supports the trainee to enrich the Pedagogy of School Subject(POSS)
along with to have practical knowledge and to understand all the
assignments in respective Pedagogy of School Subject(POSS).
23.0 As per the Government order students who are allotted and studying the
Content Component Course Subject(s) which is/are not equivalent to the
students who are studying actual courses during three year UG degree
programme.

19 
 
24.0 Content Component Course Subject(s) shall be Guided/Taught by the
either concerned Pedagogy Teacher Educator or shall be taught the
subject by arranging Guest Lectures or can be taught by providing Self
Learning Modules (SLM).
25.0 Any Unforeseen problems/ difficulties may be resolved by the Vice-
Chancellor, whose decision in the matter shall be final.
26.0 Scheme of Examination of Content Component Course Subject for
Bachelor of Education (B.ED) Degree Programme:
26.1 Scheme of Examination:
26.1.1. There shall be a University Examination at the end of each First &
Second semester. University will conduct the Examination and
Valuation Work but marks obtained in the Content Component
Course Subject(s) should not be added for the calculation of
percentage of total B.Ed. Marks.
26.1.2. There shall be Examination Fees of Rs.100/- per content paper per
semester for Content Component Course Subject(s) which is to be
remitted to the University in addition to the B.Ed. Main Examination.
26.1.3. The Scheme of studies and Examination of B.Ed. Course (Vide
Annexure 1)
26.1.4. The Composition of each Content Component Course Subject(s) shall
be 50 Theory Marks and no Internal Assessment Mark.
26.1.5. Content Component Course Subject(s) Examination Question Paper
Pattern for Content Component Course subject (CCC) duration of
Examination is of 2 hours.

Scheme No. of Questions to be Marks Total Nature of objectives to be


answered for Marks covered
Question
A Five Questions out of 2 10 School subject(s) Application
Eight Questions to be type of Questions each should
answered be answered not more than one
page
B Four Questions out of 5 20 Knowledge Comprehension
Six Questions to be type of Questions on School
answered subjects related, each should be
(5 X 4 = 20) answered one page
C Two Questions with 10 20 Understanding/
Internal Choice Comprehension and Analysis,

20 
 
(2 X 10 = 20) synthesis evaluation type
questions on school subjects
related to each should be
answered 2 to 3 pages.
Total 50
Note: All units in a given Subject / Paper should be adequately represented
in the question paper.
• Due weightage in terms of marks should be given each unit.
26.2 Board of Examiners and Valuation:
26.2.1 There shall be a Board of Examination for scrutinizing and approving
the question papers of Content Component Course Subject(s).
26.2.2 Valuation should be done based on the scheme of valuation which is
to be prepared by paper setter.

26.3 Successful Candidates:

26.3.1 Minimum for a passing for each Content Component Course


Subject(s) is 20. Marks obtained for each Content Component
Course Subject(s) cannot be considered for the calculation of
percentage or awarding any class. A ward of class is not applicable
for Content Component Course Subject(s) in the University
Examination.

If the Candidate is obtained below 20 or less than 20 marks shall be


declared as fail. A Grace Mark is applicable for Content Component
Course Subject(s) as per the existing rule of the University.
26.4 Provision for Repeaters:
26.4.1. A Candidate is allowed to carry the previous Content Component
Course Subject paper(s) to the subsequent semester provided he/she
has to be satisfactorily fulfilled the attendance requirements prescribed.
Candidate who have failed or remained absent in any Content
Component Course Subject(s) shall appear for such paper(s) in the
two immediate Successive Examinations that are conducted.

The Candidate shall take the examination as per the syllabus and
scheme of examination in force during the subsequent appearance.
26.5 Claim of Exemption:
21 
 
26.5.1. Candidates who failed in the Content Component Course Subject(s)
examination may claim exemption at their option at subsequent
attempts in the subject(s) in which they have obtained atleast 20 marks
(40 percentage or more). Such candidates who pass in subsequent
attempts however will not be eligible for any class.
26.5.2. There is no provision for improvement of Content Component Course
Subject(s)
26.6 Code Number for the Content Component Course Subject(s)
26.6.1. There shall be separate Code Number for the Content Component
Course Subject(s) – C is code which follows number. The details of
the Code Number for each semester for each paper are as follows:

Sl. Subject First Second


No. Semester Semester
1 Content Component Course in History C 9 C 29
2 Content Component Course in Kannada C 11 C 31
3 Content Component Course in English C 10 C 30
4 Content Component Course in Sanskrit C 15 C 35
5 Content Component Course in Hindi C 12 C 32
6 Content Component Course in Urdu C 14 C 34
7 Content Component Course in Marathi C 13 C 33
8 Content Component Course in Geography C 8 C 28
9 Content Component Course in Physical Science C 6 C 26
10 Content Component Course in Biological Science C 7 C 27
11 Content Component Course in Mathematics C 5 C 25

26.7 Annexure – II
B.Ed. Course Scheme of Examination – CBCS and Semester Scheme Semester – I
Sl. Paper Paper Title Instructio Cre I.A. Universit Tota
No nal Hours dits y l
. per Week Examina
tion
1 S1 Course 1 Childhood and Growing Up 4 4 20 80 100
2 S1 Course 2 Language Across the 4 4 20 80 100
Curriculum
3 S1 Course 3 Understanding Discipline & 4 4 20 80 100
Subject
4 S1 Course 4 Skills and Strategies of 4 4 20 80 100
Teaching
5 S1 Course 5 Pedagogy of School 4 4 20 80 100
Subject-I (POSS-I)

22 
 
6 S1 Course 6 Pedagogy of School 4 4 20 80 100
Subject-II (POSS-II)
7 S1 EPC - I Reading and Reflection - - - - Grade
Texts
8 * CCC-I Content Component Course 2 2 - 50 50

9 * CCC-II Content Component Course 2 2 - 50 50

Total 24 24 120 480 600


I-Semester:
EPC- I Reading and Reflection Texts.To be assessed using Grades: A/B/C/D/E
(*) University will conduct the Examination and Valuation. But Marks
should not be added for the calculation of Percentage for Total B.Ed.
Marks.
(*) Candidates who are not studied school subjects at their degree level and
they have to study CCC subjects as per the regulations and they have to
study extra two credits for each CCC subjects.

B.Ed. Course Scheme of Examination – CBCS and Semester Scheme Semester – II


Sl. Paper Paper Title Instructio Cre I.A. University Total
No. nal Hours dits Examinati
per Week on
1 S2 Course 7 Learning and Teaching 4 4 20 80 100
2 S2 Course 8 Knowledge & Curriculum-I 4 4 20 80 100
3 S2 Course 9 Assessment for Learning 4 4 20 80 100
4 S2 Course 10 Educational Technology 4 4 20 80 100
5 S2Course 11 Pedagogy of School Subject-I 4 4 20 80 100
(POSS-I)
6 S2Course 12 Pedagogy of School Subject-II 4 4 20 80 100
(POSS-II)
7 EPC-II Drama and Art in Education - - - - Grade

8 Practicum Citizenship Training Camp - - - - Grade

9 * CCC-I Content Component Course-I 2 2 - 50 50


10 * CCC-II Content Component Course-II 2 2 - 50 50

Total 24 24 120 480 600

II-Semester:
EPC-II: Drama and Art in Education. To be assessed using Grades:-A/B/C/D/E
(*) University will conduct the Examination and Valuation. But Marks
should not be added for the calculation of Percentage for Total B.Ed.
Marks.
(*) Candidates who are not studied school subjects at their degree level and
they have to study CCC subjects as per the regulations and they have to
study extra two credits for each CCC subjects.
23 
 
B.Ed. Course Scheme of Examination – CBCS and Semester Scheme
Semester – III
Sl. Paper Paper Title Instructio Credits I.A. University Total
No. nal Hours Examination
per Week
1 S3 Course -13 Gender, School and Society 4 4 20 80 100

2 S3 Course-14 Creating an Inclusive School 4 4 20 80 100

3 S3 Course-15 Critical Understanding (ICT) 4 4 20 80 100

4 S3 Course-16 Knowledge and Curriculum-II 4 4 20 80 100

5 S3 Course-17 Contemporary India & Education 4 4 20 80 100

S3 Course 18 Select any One Optional Papers 4 4 20 80 100


Work Education/Peace
Education/Value Education/
Guidance & Counseling/ Health
& Physical Education/ Special
Education/Action
Research/Environment Education

Total 24 24 120 480 600

B.Ed. Course Scheme of Examination – CBCS and Semester Scheme


Semester – IV
Sl. Paper Paper Title Instructional Credits I.A. University Total
No. Hours per Examination
Week
1 POSS-I School Internship On 4 4 125 50 195
POSS – I + Project Work +25
–I
2 POSS-II School Internship On 4 4 125 50 195
POSS – II + Project +25
Work – II
3 EPC-III Understanding Self - - - - Grade

Total 300 100 400


Course: Enhancing Professional Capacities :( EPC) Understanding Self
To be assessed using Grades:-A/B/C/D/E
S4 Course-19: Community Orientation and Co-Curricular Activities
1 S. U. P. W. **
2 P.E. / GAMES **
3 C. C. A. **
** To be Assessed Using Grades – A, B, C, D, E

24 
 
27.0 Marks, Credit Points (CP), Grade Points (GP), Grades and Cumulative Grade
Point Average (CGPA).

27.1    The grade points and the grade letters to candidates in each course shall be awarded as
follows:

Percentage marks Credit Points Letter Grade

75.00 to 100.00 % 7.50 to 10.00 A

60.00 to 74.90 % 6.00 to 07.49 B

50.00 to 59.94 % 5.00 to 5.99 C

40.00 to 49.94 % 4.00 to 4.99 D

Less than 40% Less than 4.00 F

27.2 Credit point (CP): The Credit Point for each course shall be calculated by
multiplying the grade point obtained by the credit of the course.

27.3 The award of Grade Point Average (GPA) : for any student is based on the
performance in the whole semester. The student is awarded Grade Point Average for
each semester based on the Total Credit Points obtained and the total number of
credits opted for. The GPA is calculated by dividing the total credit points earned by
the student in all the courses by the total number of credits of those courses of the
semester.

27.4 The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA): shall be calculated by dividing the
total number of credit points in all the semesters by the total number of credits in all
the semesters. The CGPA to date shall be calculated by dividing the total number of
credit pints in all the semesters to date by the total number of credits in all the
semesters to date.
CGPA for the First Semester = Sum of the CP of the I Semester ÷ Sum of the
credits of the I Semester
CPGA for the II Semester = Sum of the CP of the I Sem + Sum of the CP of II
Sem. ÷ Sum of the credits of the I semester + II semester
CGPA for the III and IV Semesters shall be computed accordingly.
27.5 The Grade Card at each semester examination shall indicate the courses opted by the
student, the credit for the course chosen by the student, the credit points obtained in
each course, the grade letter and the grade point average. No class shall be awarded
for each semester and the same would only be awarded at the end of all the semesters
based on Cumulative Grade Point Average.
27.6 Class shall be awarded to the successful candidates based on the Cumulative Grade
Point Average (CGPA) as specified below:

25 
 
Cumulative Grade Point Class to be awarded

Average (CGPA)

7.50 to 10.00 First class with Distinction

6.00 to 7.49 First Class

5.00 to 5.99 Second Class

4.00 to 4.99 Pass

Less than 4.00 Fail

ANNEXURE – I
SUBJECTS RELATED TO SCHOOL TEACHING SUBJECTS AND METHODS OF TEACHING TO
BE OFFERED AT B.Ed. LEVEL
Sl. School Teaching Equivalents in POSS-I POSS-II
No. subjects Bachelors Degree /
post Graduate
I II III IV V
1 LANGUAGES Languages (Kannada, Languages ANY subject studied
TAUGHT AS English, Hindi, Urdu, (Kannada, English, as MAJOR
LANGUAGE IN Tamil, Telugu, Marati, Hindi, Urdu, Tamil, SUBJECT as listed
THE SCHOOLS Sanskrit, Malayalam) Telugu, Marati, in col III at Sl. No 2,
(KANNADA,
studied as optional at Sanskrit, 3 & 4 at Bachelors
ENGLISH, HINDI,
URDU, TAMIL,
Diploma / Bachelors Malayalam) taught degree / PG level or
TELUGU, Degree level / P.G. level in schools as subject studied as
MARATI, in Language offered by Methods or above content-cum-
SANSKRIT, universities recognized Languages studied methodology II
MALAYALAM) by UGC, in languages as content-cum-
taught in schools in methodology I
Karnataka State.
2 ARTS/HUMANITI History, Political History/ANY Geography / Lang
CS/COMMERCE/ Science, Economics, subject listed in ANY subject studied
SOCIAL SCIENCE Sociology, Geography COL No III of as MAJOR
(HISTORY, as optional at Bachelors Sl.No 2 studied as SUBJECT as listed
POLITICAL Degree level / P.G. level MAJOR SUBJECT in col III at Sl. No 1,
SCIENCE,
ECONOMICS,
at Bachelors degree at Bachelors degree /
SOCIOLOGY / PG level or subject PG level or subject
GEOGRAPHY) studied as content- studied as content-
cum-methodology I cum-methodology II

26 
 
3 PHYSICAL Physics, Chemistry, Physics/ ANY Mathematics/
SCIENCE Mathematics as subject listed in Chemistry / ANY
(PHYSICS, optionals at Bachelors COL No III of Sl. subject listed in COL
CHEMISTRY, Degree level / P.G. level No 3 studied as No III of Sl. No 1
MATHEMATICS) MAJOR SUBJECT studied as MAJOR
at Bachelors degree SUBJECT at
/ PG level or subject Bachelors degree /
studied as content- PG level or subject
cum-methodology I studied as content-
cum-methodology II
4 LIFE SCIENCE Chemistry, Botany, Biological Science/ Chemistry/ ANY
/BIOLOGICAL Zoology Environmental ANY subject listed subject listed in COL
SCIENCE Science / Fisheries / in COL No III of Sl. No III of Sl. No 1
(CHEMISTRY, Forestry / Micro No 4 studied as studied as MAJOR
BOTANY, Biology / Genetics / Bio MAJOR SUBJECT SUBJECT at
ZOOLOGY)
Science / Physiology / at Bachelors degree Bachelors degree /
Cell Biology / / PG level or subject PG level or subject
sericulture as studied as content- studied as content-
optional at Bachelors cum-methodology I cum-methodology II
Degree level / P.G. level

Appendix – I : EPC -1 Reading and Reflecting on Texts


There have been studies to show that Under-Graduate Students in our
universities are reluctant readers and struggle to write for different purposes.
This course will serve as a foundation to enable B.Ed. Students to read and
respond to a variety of texts in different ways and also learn to think together,
depending on the text and the purposes of reading. Responses may be
personal or creative or critical or all of these together. Students will also
develop metacognitive awareness to become conscious of their own
thinking processes as they grapple with diverse texts. In other words, this
course will enable student-teachers to enhance their capacities as readers
and writers by becoming participants in the process of reading. A related
course to this, 'Language Across the Curriculum’, looks at the role of language
and the pedagogy of reading and writing across other subjects. The aim is to
engage with the readings interactively- individually and in small groups. This
involves framing questions to think about, while preparing to read something,
reading a text, and reflexively placing what one has read in the context of
both the texts and one’s own experiences. We are also resources for one
another, both as a function of our differences and one another’s responses to
what we read. The work in this course should focus on making and appraising
arguments and interpretations, creating thoughtful arguments by making
conjectures and offering justification for them (Anderson, 1984).
This course offers opportunities to read a wide variety of texts,
including empirical, conceptual, and historical work, policy documents, studies
about Schools, Teaching, Learning, and about different people’s experiences of
27 
 
all of these. The course will also include narrative texts, expository texts from
diverse sources, including autobiographical narratives, field notes,
ethnographies, etc. to address different types of reading skills and strategies.
This will also initiate them and prepare them for the course requirements of
working on the field, as well as for selected readings and writing for the other
courses. For expository texts, they will learn to make predictions, check their
predictions, answer questions and then summarize or retell what they’ve read
(Grellet, 1981). Students will analyse various text structures to see how these
contribute to the comprehension of a text. These readings will also provide the
context for writing. Combining reading and writing 2-Year B.Ed. Curriculum
20 leads to the development of Critical Skills. Student-Teachers will get
opportunities to write with a sense of purpose and audience, through tasks such
as, responding to a text with one’s own opinions or writing within the context of
others’ ideas.
Suggested Activities on EPC-1: Library Work/Paper Reading/Journal
Reading/Magazines Reading/Preparation Album on Different Themes of
Education, Pamphlets Monogram, Hand Books, Manuscript Magazines,
Collection of Archives etc..,

Appendix – II : EPC-II : Drama and Art in Education


Transformational education involves reflection, introspection and action,
with a deep relationship between the head, heart and hand. The National
Curricular Framework 2005 (NCF) reminds us that the school curriculum must
integrate various domains of knowledge, so that the ‘curricular’ encompasses
all, and is not separated from the co-curricular or extra-curricular. This has
significant implications for the role of art, music and drama in education, to
nurture children’s creativity and aesthetic sensibilities. Learning is enhanced
through Drama in Education (John, Yogin, & Chawla, 2007) which helps
learners to extend their awareness, through multiple perspectives, to look at
reality through fantasy, and to predict everyday situations in order to cope with
unpredictable unsettling experiences. Drama in Education transcends the here
and now, to travel through time - to the past, to the future, while it also allows
us to freeze time. Thus we can live or relive moments and evoke or even
recreate situations that can help us accept them better. Drama in Education is
not merely doing theatrics or ‘acting’ in a superficial manner, but is for creating
that ‘dramatic pressure’ or tension, where the student would arrive at a .problem
or an understanding in a new way (Heathcoat & Bolton, 1994).
The challenge is for prospective teachers to understand the medium, in
order to transpose learners into a different time and space, to shape their
consciousness through introspection and imagined collective experience. For
instance, activities such as ‘hot seating’ can be used to raise critical questions
addressed to characters from the textbook or those in history, to think about
28 
 
significant developments within diverse social contexts. This also helps to
stretch the learner into areas of ‘discomfort’ and ‘confusion’, to then seek
resolution, clarity and understanding. In the present context where children are
growing up in starkly segregated environments, bounded by caste, class,
religion or gender, drama must be used to potentially interrogate these
categories - Who is the other? Why? How is the process of ‘othering’ happening
in different lives? Mere moral sermons do not help build sensitivities. The
ability to feel empathy for and relate with the other can be nurtured through
drama based on experience, emotion and interpretation. It also gives
opportunities for learners to recognise their agency, for transformational action.
Drama as ‘critical pedagogy’ can move beyond the classroom, to invoke the
collective consciousness and involve the community to participate in
educational and social change.
Teachers will need to experience different genres of street theatre that
continue to engage with life, through folk and contemporary traditions,
improvising and critiquing, while mobilising for transformative action The
course on Drama and Art in Education also helps in understanding the self and
as a form of self-expression for enhancing creativity. The components of fine
arts aim to develop aesthetic sensibilities in student-teachers and learn the use of
art in teaching learning (Prasad, 1998). Student teachers will visit places of art,
exhibitions and cultural festivals. Encouragement needs to be given to
understand local culture and art forms and interpret art works, movies and other
Media. Likewise other activities can be used to build trust and cooperation, the
sense of responsibility, pursuing tasks collectively and exploring varied
perspectives. Be it visual or performing, the practice of art deepens children’s
ability for perception, reflection and expression, providing them with alternative
languages to experience and communicate subtle, diverse and unfamiliar
territories, from human to the larger consciousness of nature (Armstrong, 1980;
Davis, 2008). The challenge of teacher educators lies not only in expanding the
landscapes of children’s art, but in also perceiving their world, their artistic
processes and then from that sense of understanding, explore ways of assessing
their work (Carini, 2001).
Note: (List of Activities for EPC-II) Dramatization, Role Play Model, Street
Drama, Puppets, Tableau, Video Presentation, Lecture on Art, Group Projects,
Preparing Film and Documentary on Art education , Art Based Practice through
incorporating variety modes of play etc.., The college should maintain record
on any activities relating to promote EPC - II
Note: College is free to introduce any activities to promote EPC-II of Student
Trainees.
Appendix – III School Internship
Having gained some experience with the child, the community and
schools in Year 1, the Second Year would offer intensive engagement
29 
 
with the school in the form of School Internship. During the first year, to
support better understanding of schools and in preparation of Internship,
teacher education institutes shall make provisions for visits to innovative
centres of pedagogy and learning - innovative schools, educational
resource centres, etc.
During the Internship, a student-teacher shall work as a regular teacher
and Participate in all the school activities, including planning, teaching
and assessment, interacting with school teachers, community members
and children. Before teaching in a classroom, the student-teachers will
observe the school and its classrooms for a week, to understand the
school in totality, its philosophy and aims, organisation and management;
the life of a teacher; needs of the physical, mental, emotional
development of children; aspects of curriculum and its transaction;
quality, transaction, and assessment of teaching–learning.
School Internship shall be designed to lead to the development of a broad
repertoire of perspectives, professional capacities, teacher dispositions,
sensibilities and skills. Student teachers shall be equipped to cater to
diverse needs of learners in schools. Student-teachers are to be actively
engaged in teaching at two levels, namely, upper primary and secondary.
They should be provided opportunities to teach in government and private
schools with systematic supervisory support and feedback from faculty.
Internship in schools is to be done for a minimum duration of 15 weeks.
This should include an initial phase of one week for observing a regular
classroom with a regular teacher and would also include peer
observations, teacher observations and observations of interns’ lessons by
faculty. It is important that the student-teachers consolidate and reflect on
their teaching experience during and after the school internship.
Therefore, along with writing reflective journals during the internship
programme, there shall be space for extended discussions and
presentations on different aspects of the teaching experience after the
internship.
For each student-teacher, internship should be conducted preferably in
one school for the entire 15 weeks. However, if the institute wants to
provide an opportunity to understand the context of teaching in a
government and private school or the dynamics of teaching at elementary
and senior secondary levels, this period can be divided into two blocks.
Internship may be arranged in two blocks in such a way that teaching in
one school at a particular level (for example elementary or senior
secondary) during one block, is followed by the teaching in another
school or the same school at another level during the second block. Under
any circumstances, the student-teacher should not be sent to more than

30 
 
two schools during her/his internship period. Internship should not be
reduced to the ‘delivery’ of a certain number of lesson plans, but should
aim for meaningful and holistic engagement with learners and the school.
Moreover, teaching should not be practiced through the reductionist
approach of ‘microteaching’ of isolated ‘skills’ and simulated lessons.
Pre-Internship Activities: This is meant to prepare the ground for making
internship more meaningful and strengthen relation with the practicing
schools.
Duration: One Week Provides an Orientation to student teachers on the
following, taking the help of School Teachers and / or Headmasters:
• Preparing unit plans and lesson plans
• Identification of lessons and different resources available in school
• Construction of achievement and diagnostic test
• Maintaining peer group observation records
• Writing reflective journals
• Maintaining Physical Education records
• Preparing reports on school activities
Pre-internship conference with co-operating schools to be organized by
institutions.
EPC III: Understanding the Self
The aim of the course is to develop understanding of student-teachers about themselves the
development of the self as a person and as a teacher, through conscious ongoing reflection.
The course would be transacted through a workshop mode by more than one resource
persons.
Understanding and Self means-
• Defining one’s values towards self and society
• Core values that focus on the dignity and worth of a person: Co-operation,
Empathy, Honesty, Humility, Simplicity, Tolerance, Responsibility
• Exploring the universal values from a personal perspective
• Democratic values and other constitutional values
• Harmonious ways of living (with oneself, nature and others)
• Learning to live together
• Discussion based on films and documentaries of educational values
• Readings, discussions and reflection of values based on literature
• Designing tools (including introspection, personal diary, dance, poetry as
tools) to facilitate self reflection
• Role of peace in everyday life in general and school in particular
The course will address aspects of development of the inner self and the professional
identity of a teacher. This shall enable student-teachers to develop sensibilities, dispositions,
and skills that will later help them in facilitating the personal growth of their own students
while they teach. It is important for student-teachers to develop social relational sensitivity
and effective communication skills, including the ability to listen and observe (Hall & Hall,
2003). The course will nable student-teachers to develop a holistic and integrated

31 
 
understanding of the human self and personality; to build resilience within to deal with
conflicts at different levels and learn to create teams to draw upon collective strengths.
As an individual in society one has different identities – gender, relational, cultural –
and it is important to address one’s implicit beliefs, stereotypes and prejudices resulting from
these identities. It is important for the student-teachers to be aware of their identities and the
political, historical, and social forces that shape them. The course will make use of personal
narratives, life stories, group interactions, film reviews – to help explore one’s dreams,
aspirations, concerns, through varied forms of self-expression, including poetry and humour,
creative movement, aesthetic representations, etc. Yoga will also be introduced as an
important component to enhance abilities of body and mind, and promote sensibilities that
help to live in peace and harmony with one’s surroundings. Students will appreciate the
philosophy of yoga and its role in well-being. They will learn the practice of yoga and how
to use it in different contexts.
The course shall also focus on revisiting one’s childhood experiences – influences,
limitations and potentials – while empathising with other childhoods, and also the childhood
experiences of one's peers. The following methodologies for the transaction of the
course could be used in interactive sessions:
• Sharing case studies/biographies/stories of different children who are raised in
different circumstances and how this affected their sense of self and identity
formation.
• Watching a movie/documentary where the protagonist undergoes trials and finally
discovers her/his potential despite odds.
• Issues of contemporary adolescence/youth need to be taken up as student-teachers
first need to understand themselves; and themselves in relation to their students and
classroom situations.
• Different modes of expression can be used in each of the sessions (so that each of the
students get a chance to express herself through any of the modes that they are
comfortable in) and at the end of the year, the resource person and the coordinating
faculty can reflect back on whether all modes of expression were included through
the sessions of not.
• The exercise of developing reflective journals and providing regular feedback on
those journals can also be used here.

Values and Individual Connecting - Social


Broad areas Introduction
and collective
self image self-society Interface
selves
Main Trust Opening Team Understanding Becoming
building, for self, building, social the change
objectives
future reflection, respecting, structures agent –
exercises, culture for tasks, sharing (stereotypes/ designing
laying listening Responsibility. diversity / and
ground and addressing gender) and leading
rules, role of the change /
accepting conflicts
energizing individual social action

32 
 
Broad Games, Reflections, Nature walk/ Films, meeting Participate
theatre story field visit , people, small or lead in
methodologies
activities, making, self Adventure. group tasks, real life
disclosure Simulation theatre intervention
discussions
through exercises, (within
exercises
art, dance families/
collective art
college or
and theatre
community)

33 
 
 
 

34 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
SYLLABUS 
Semester 1 
 

35 
 
Karnatak Univrsity, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­1: Childhood and Growing up 
 
Objectives: After completion of the course, student­teachers will be able to:­         48 Hours 
1. Understand  children  of  different  ages  by  interacting  and  observing  them  in  diverge  social, 
economic and cultural context rather than through an exclusive  focus on psychological theories 
of child development. 
2. The study of childhood, child development and adolescence. 
3. Understand learning as divergent process. 
4. Make aware about the importance of healthy liking and preventing disease. 
5. Introduce psychological trials of learners. 
6. Penetrate health awareness among prospective teachers. 
7. Understand the role of the family and the school in the child’s development. 
 

UNIT – I: Childhood and child Development 
1. Childhood: Meaning, concept and characteristics.  
2. Social  and  emotional  development  of  child  (with  special  reference  to  diverse  social,  economic 
and cultural backgrounds). 
3. Physical& intellectual development of child.  
4. Development  of  concept  formation,  logical  reasoning,  problem‐solving  and  creative  thinking  & 
language development. 
5. Effect of family, schools, neighborhoods and community on social and emotional development of 
child. 
 

UNIT – II: Adolescent Development 
1. Adolescent: Meaning, concept and characteristics.  
2. Cognitive,  Physical  social,  Emotional  and  moral  Development  patterns  and  characteristics  of 
adolescent’s learner. 
3. Social and emotional construction of adolescence, various social‐cultural and political dimension 
associate with its positioning and development in society. 
4. Impact  of  urbanization  and  economic  change  on  adolescent.  Issues  of  marginalization  of 
difference and diversity and stereotyping. 
 

UNIT – III: Learning: 
1. Learning: Meaning, concept and Nature of learning, factors influencing learning. 
2. Process and outcome of learning. 
3. Domains of learning, cognitive, Affective and psychomotor. 
4. Maturation and learning. 
5. Learning skills. 
 

UNIT – IV Physical & Mental Hygiene: 
1. Mental health & Hygiene: Meaning, Concept and Factors affecting mental Health & Hygiene.  
2. Development  of  Good  mental  Health,  characteristics  of  mentally  healthy  teacher,  to  improve 
mental health of teachers. 
3. Personal  and  environmental  hygiene,  Family  and  school  health/prevention  of  accident,  Health 
information, disease prevention and health information. 
 

UNIT – V Psychological – trials & test 
1. Emotional Intelligence & Intelligence 
2. Personality 
3. Creativity 
4. Cognitive development of learner. 
5. Test of Mental health 
 

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials  


 

Unit – I : Practicum/Field Work 
• Organize  creative  activities  for  children  of  diverse  socio‐  cultural  background  with  aim  to

36 
 
learn to communicate and relate with them.
• Create child based new activity to learn to listen to children with attention and empathy. 
 

Unit – II : Practicum/Field Work 
• Project on your experiences to be had with adolescence of diverse contexts such as orphan, 
backward Classes and street children, interact with them(special reference to their physical, 
mental and emotional development)   
• Seminar or workshop for student teacher to observe, interact with and study adolescents of 
different ages in and outside the school, in diverge social‐economic, cultural, linguistic and 
regional contexts. 
 

Unit – III : Practicum/Field Work 
• Observing  learners,  in  natural  setting  to  study  play  patterns  and  write  a  report  on  their 
domain of learning, the report present class in the presence of teacher education.  
• To  study  children  of  diverse  economic  and  societal  &  cultural  context  for  understanding 
learners’ thinking and learning and prepare a report.  
 

Unit – IV : Practicum/Field Work 
• Examine  the  physical  hygiene  of  school  and  any  social  place  in  order  to  make  critical 
appreciation. 
• Conduct an awareness program in school by the pupil teacher on physical and mental health 
after getting training on prayer, yoga and meditation. 
 

Unit – V : Practicum/Field Work 
• Apply any five Psychological tests on upper primary to senior secondary students (any one)
and  on  the  basis  of  the  conclusion,  make  a  comprehensive  profile,(at  least  ten  students  for
each test). 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
 

                            Evaluation Procedure                                                                
Sessional work & tests   20 Marks
External Evaluation   80 Marks
 

References 
 
1. Shrivashra  D.N,  VermaPreeti  2007,  Child  Psychology:  Child  Development  VinodPustakMandir, 
Agra. 
2. Pareek  Prof  Matworeshwar,  2002,  Child  Development  and  Family  RelahOnship,  Research 
Publication, Jaipur. 
3. Mangal Dr. S.K, MangalShubhra, 2005, Child Development, Arya Book Depot New Delhi. 
4. Sharma, R.k, Sharma, H.S, Tiwari, Aryana, 2006, Psychological Foundation of Child development, 
RodhaPrakashanMandir, Agra. 
5. Singh.  Dr.  D.p,  talang.  Amritanshy,  prakashved.  2002  psycho‐  social  basis  of  learning  and 
development, research publication, jaipur. 
6. Shrivasha.  D.N.  Verma,  Verma,  Dr.Preeti  2010,  Modern  Experimental  Psychology  and  Teshing, 
ShriVinodPustakHandir, Agra. 
7. Mathur,  Dr.s.s.  2007‐08,  Development  of  learner  and  Teaching  learning  process,  Agrawal 
publication, Agra. 
8. Mishra. R.c. 2010, child psychoplogy. A.P.H publishing corporation, New Delhi. 
9. Dweck, C. (2006). Mindset: The new psychology of success. Random House LLC. 
10. Piaget,  J.  (1997)  development  and  learning.  in  M  gauvarin&  M.  Cole  (Eds.)  readings  on  the 
development of children. New York. WH freeman & company 
11. Plato (2009) Reason and persuasion Three dialogues in J. Holbo  (Ed) meno: reason, persuasion 
and virtue. person. 
12. Saraswathi  T.  S.  (1999)adult‐child  continuity  in  india:  in  adolescence  a  myth  or  an  emerging 
relity?  in  T.S.  Saraswathi  9Ed)  culture,  socialization  and  human  development  :  theory  research 
and applications in india. New Delhi Sage. 
 

37 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­2 : Language across the Curriculum 
Objectives: After completion of the course, student­teachers will be able to:­           48 Hours 
* understand the language background of students as the first or second language users.  
* create sensitivity to the language diversity that exists in the classroom. 
* understand the nature of classroom discourse and develop strategies for using oral language in the    
   classroom. 
* understand the nature of reading comprehension in the content area & writing in specific content areas. 
* understand interplay of language and society. 
* understand function of language and how to use it as a tool.  
* understand language and speech disorder and make remedial measure, too. 
 
Unit­I: Language and Society   
1. Rule governed system: meaning, concept and use in language. 
2. Relationship of language and society: identify, power and discrimination. 
3. Nature of multilingualism: differential status of Indian classroom language. 
4. Dialect; deficit theory (Eller, 1989) and discontinuity theory. 
 
Unit­ II Language development 
1. Theories of language development and its implementation in teaching, psychological basis of 
language. 
2. Social stimulation: gestures, emotional facial expression, posture and movements, articulate 
speech, physiognomy language development in different ages 
3. Speech  defects:  ‐  lisping,  slurring,  stuttering  and  stammering  and  role  of  teacher  in  its 
resolution. 
 
Unit­III Language acquisition 
1. Language acquisition: ‐ stages, language and thought 
2. Language acquisition and cognitive development, Biology of language acquisition language in 
different contexts 
3. Meta‐ linguistic: meaning, concept & awareness, listening, speaking, reading, comprehension 
and writing for varying context, language proficiency of teacher. 
 
Unit­IV Classroom and Language 
1. Classroom discourse: nature, a meaning and medium. 
2. Discussion as a tool for learning. 
3. Questioning  in  the  classroom–type  of  questions  and  teacher  control  (Thwaite&Rivalland, 
2009) 
4. Function of language: In the classroom and outside the classroom. 
5. Classroom as a Language laboratory 
6. Role of literature in language learning, learners’ role on understanding literature. 
 
Unit­V Reading, Writing & Analysis 
1. Reading in the content areas: ‐ social science, science and maths. 
2. Nature of expository texts vs. narrative texts, transactional vs. reflective texts. 
3. Scheme theory: text structures and examining content area. 
4. Textbooks: reading strategies for children –note making, summarizing making; reading and 
writing connection, Process writing: Analyse children’s writing to understand their 
conception: writing with a sense of purpose writing to learn and understand. 

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials 


 
Unit – I : Practicum/Field Work 
• Conduct a survey in secondary school to study academic achievement in overall or in specific subject 
of diverse linguistic students.  

38 
 
• Discuss the report in workshop or give a presentation in the class.   
• Talk  to  the  students  and  find  out  the  different  languages  that  they speak.  Prepare a plan to use 
multilingualism as a teaching strategy.   
 
Unit – II : Practicum/Field Work 
• Identify speech defects of primary level student and make a remedial strategy for resolution.   
• Draft a report on entire activity and present in class among pupil teacher and teacher education. 
 
Unit – III : Practicum/Field Work 
• Draft a report by Participatory transaction for building language acquisition skill of students in 
school. 
• Take views from parents / teachers on language acquisition of different age group in diverse 
situations. 
• Draft a report and present it in classroom discussion. 
 
Unit – IV : Practicum/Field Work 
• Organize an activity based game to motivate students for creative questioning. 
• Classroom interaction and draft a report on type of questions asked by teacher and students in class 
from diverse background. 
 
Unit – V : Practicum/Field Work 
• Close and critical reading of selective texts under discussion & readings in small groups. Students to 
go through experiential process for transacting some topics such as process writing & reading. 
• Make a systematic report of entire activities with action plan for further improvements. 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                 Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & tests   20 Marks 
External Evaluation   80 Marks 
 
Reference 
1. Agnihotri,  R.K.  (1995).  Multilingualism  as  a  classroom  resource.  In  K.  Heugh,  A  Siegruhn,  &  P. 
Pluddemann  (Eds.)  Multilingual  education  for  South  Africa  9pp.  3‐&).  Heinemann  Educational 
Books. 
2. Anderson, R.C. (1984). Role of the Reader’s Schema in comprehension, learning and memory. In R. 
C. Anderson, J. Osborn, & R.J. Tierney (Eds.), Learning to read in American Schools: Basad readers 
and Content texts. Psychology Press. 
3. Eller, R.G. (1989). Johnny can’t talk, either: The perpetuation of the deficit theory in classrooms. 
The Reaing Teacher, 670‐674. 
4. Erlwanger,  S. H. (1973).  Benny’s conception  of  rules  and  answers  in  IPI  Mathematics.  Journal of 
children’s Mathematical Behavior, 1(2), 7‐26 
5. Grellet, f. (1981). Developing reading skills: A practical Gude to reading comprehension exercises. 
Cambridge University Press. 
6. Ladson‐Billings.  G.  (1995).  Toward  a  Theory  of  Culturally  Relevant  Pedagogy.  American 
Educational research journal. 32(3), 465‐491. 
7. NCERT. (2006d) Position Paper National Focus Group on teaching of Indian language (NCF‐ 2005). 
New Delhi: NCERT. 
8. Thwaite, A. &Rivalland, J.(2009) How can analysis of classroom Taks help teachers reflect on their 
practices? Australian Journal of Language and Literacy, the 32(1) 38. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
39 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­3 :  Understanding  Discipline and Subjects 
Objectives: After completion of the course, student­teachers will be able to:­          48 Hours 
1. Understand chronological evolution of knowledge. 
2. Understand theory related to human needs change with time. 
3. Reflect  on  the  nature  and  role  of  disciplinary  knowledge  in  the  school  curriculum  and  the 
paradigm  shifts  in  the  nature  of  disciplines  with  some  discussion  on  the  history  of  teaching  of 
subject areas in schools. 
4. Historically review on sea change in disciplinary areas, especially social science, natural science 
and linguistics. 
5. Understand methods of study and validation of knowledge in changing scenario. 
6. Understand how the content was selected, framed in the syllabus, and how it can be transformed 
so that learners construct their own knowledge through it. 
7. Study govt. policies on teaching of subjects after independence and its impact. 
 
Unit­I Disciplinary knowledge 
1. Knowledge:  ‐  definition,  its  genesis  and  general  growth  from  the  remote  past  to  21th 
century. 
2. Nature and role of disciplinary knowledge in the school curriculum, the paradigm shifts 
in the nature of discipline 
3. History of the teaching of subject areas in schools. 
4. The  role  of  such  disciplinary  areas  like  language,  maths,  social  science,  science  in  the 
overall scheme of the School curriculum (from philosophical point of view John Dewey) 
 

Unit­II Disciplinary areas 
1. Redefinition and reformulation of disciplines and school subjects over the last two centuries ( in 
particular social, political and intellectual contexts) 
2. Sea change in disciplinary areas (especially social science, natural science and linguistic) during 
last fifty years :‐Science form 15th century up to 21th century  
3. Linguistic from 15th century up to 21th century 
4. Advances of knowledge : teaching from 15th century up to 21th century 
5. Evolution of knowledge: humanities from 15th century up to 21th century. 
6. Landmarks of knowledge: social science from 15th century up to 21th century. 
 

Unit­III Content of discipliner 
1. Theory of content: need theory, hygiene theory and Maslow’s theory 
2. Selection criteria of content in the syllabus.  
3. Transformation of content for construction of learners own knowledge through it,  
4. Criteria of inclusion or exclusion of a subject area from the school curriculum. 
 

Unit­IV Development in disciplines:­ 
1. Recent developments in science, maths and philosophy in school level curriculum. 
2. Post independence era govt. policies on teaching of science, math and social science. 
3. Modes of thinking: meaning, concept and factors effecting it. 
4. Positivistic, speculative and authority centered modes of thinking: their impact on pure & applied 
sciences, social sciences and humanities. 
 

Unit­V Designing of disciplines 
1. Differentiate among   curriculum, syllabus and text books. 
2. Designing of curriculum, syllabus and text books. 
3. Criteria of selection good text books, magazine and journal. 
4. Importance of practical, community and intuitive or tacit knowledge in design of school subjects. 
5. Issues of social reconstruction   selected to design school subjects. 

40 
 
Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials
 

Unit – I : Practicum/Field Work 
• Conduct an activity from school subject which is essential for further life at upper primary to senior 
secondary level. 
• Conduct a play on life history of eminent persons, so that students can follow or accept as role model. 
• Seminar on scheme of school curriculum. 
 
Unit – II : Practicum/Field Work 
• Assign tasks to students to collect information from their grandparents about change in life style, 
then with the help of student analyse the reason of these changes. (Due to advancement in science 
and technology) and present the report in assembly. 
• Conduct a play on advances of knowledge in teaching/education from 15th century to 21th Century. 
 
Unit – III : Practicum/Field Work 
• Workshop on “writing a paper for book, magazine and journal.  
• Workshop on transformation of content for construction of learners own knowledge. according to 
present need. 
• Debate on criteria of inclusion or exclusion of a subject area from school curriculum. 
 
Unit – IV : Practicum/Field Work 
• Select any appropriate topic of your subject at school level and organize a play in which ‐ community, 
student and teachers will have actively evolved. 
• Critical review of post‐independence era govt. policies and its implementation on teaching of 
science/maths/social science/ language. 
• Draft a report after deep study on recent developments in science/maths/philosophy in school 
curriculum. 
• Analyse the Periodicals like newspaper, Magazine, Journals etc. in the light of social needs of 
science/social science/maths etc.   
Unit – V : Practicum/Field Work 
• Critical review of a text literature of your subject area. 
• Make  a  project  related  to  farming,  horticulture  or  hospitality  by  which  student  may  acquire 
knowledge of multidiscipline.  
• Write about a book, which is the best, with logic and justification. 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 
 
Reference 
1. Zastoupil, L. &Moir, M. (1999) the great Indian education debate: Documents Relating to the 
orientalist‐anglicis controversy, 1781‐1843, Psychology press. 
2. UNESCO, (2009) Policy guidelines on inclusion in education UNESCO. 
3. Valerian rodrigues, (2002) democracy. In the essential writings of B.R. AmSSkar (pp60‐64) New 
Delhi: oxford University press. 
4. Shulman L. S. (1986) those who understand: knowledge growth in teaching. Educational 
researcher, 4‐14 
5. Scrase, T. J. (2002). Globalisation and the cultural politics of educational change: the controversy 
over teaching on English in west Bengal. International review of education 48(5), 361‐375 
6. Poste, R. Pster, T. M, & Ross. D. (Eds) (2003) the combridge history of science: Volume 7 the 
modern social sciences. Cambridge University press. 
7. Plato (2009) Reason and persuasion Three dialogues (chapter ^) in J. Holbo (Ed) meno: reason, 
persuasion and virtue. Person. 
8. Naik. J.P. &Nurullah, S. (1974) a student’s history of education in india (1800‐1973). Macmillan 
9. Montuschi, E. (2003). Objects of social science. London: continuum press. 

41 
 
10. Ladson‐Billings. G. (1995). Toward a theory of culturally relevant pedagogy. American Educational 
research journal. 32(3), 465‐491. 
11. Hodson, D, (1987). Science curriculum change in Victorian England: A case study of the science of 
common things. In I. Goodson (Ed.), International perspectives in curriculum history. Croom helm. 
12. Goodson, I.F. &Marsh, C.J. (2005). Studying school subjects: A guide. Rouledge. 
13. GOI. (1992, 1998), National policy on education, 1986 (As modified in 1992). Retrieved from 
http://mhrd.gov.in/sites/upload_files/mhrd/files/NPE86‐mod92.pdf 
14. Ghosh, S.C. (2007). History of education in India. Rawat publications. 
15. Deng, Z (2013) School subjects and academic disciplines. In A. Luke, A. Woods, &Wer (Eds.), 
Curriculum syllabus design and equity: A primer and model. Routledge. 
16. Deplit, L.D. (1988). The silenced dialogue: Power and pedagogy in educating other people’s 
children. Harvard Educational Review, 58(3), 280‐299. 
17. Charkavarti, U. (1998). Rewriting history: The life and Times of PanditaRamabai. Zubaan. 
18. Carr, D.(2005). Making sense of education: An introducation to the philosophy and theory of 
education and teaching. Routledge. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

42 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­4:  Skills and Strategies of Teaching 
Objectives : Upon completion of the course the student teacher will able to : 48 hours
1. Acquire competency in different teaching skills.
2. Understand the content of application of different strategies of teaching and also implement them.
3. Understand and appreciate the role communication in effective teaching.
4. Understand the implicit of teacher communication on student personality.
5. Understand the various features of models of teaching effectiveness.
6. Know and understand the correlates of teaching effectiveness.
7. Acquaint with classroom interaction analysis category system.
Unit : 1 Micro Teaching
1.1 Meaning, definitions and importance of micro teaching.
1.2 Micro teaching cycle
1.3 Elements of micro teaching – Modelling, Setting Feedback, Integtration.
1.4 Planning and teaching of micro skills – Meaning, Components,
Observational schedule and planning of :
1.4.1 Set induction / Introducing lesson
1.4.2 Explanation
1.4.3 Probing questions
1.4.4 Stimulus variation
1.4.5 Illustrating with examples
1.4.6 Black board writing
1.4.7 Fluency in questioning
1.4.8 Writing Instructional Objectives
(only first six skills are to be practiced)
Unit : 2 Strategies of Teaching
Teacher centered methods:
2.1 Exposition method – Meaning, context of use, features of exposition method.
2.2 Demonstration method – Meaning, Planning and uses.
Learner Centered Method
2.3 Discussion method – Meaning, context, and importance. Types of small group discussion –
Meaning, procedure of conducting and uses of Brain storming, Buzz and Panel discussion.
2.4 Project method – Meaning, purpose, steps, merits and demerits
Unit : 3 Models of Teaching
3.1 Meaning, distinction between methods and models.
3.2 General features in terms of objectives, syntax, social system, principles of reaction, support
system and effects.
3.3 Families of models of teaching.
3.4 Concept attainment model and Role playing model.
Unit : 4 Communication and Teaching Effectiveness
4.1 Meaning, components, types (verbal and non-verbal), barriers (physical, language and
psychology) and effective classroom communication.
4.2 Meaning and distinction between teaching effectiveness and teacher competency.
4.3 Flanders Interaction Analysis Category System : Description of categories, observation procedure
and training in observation.
4.4 Correlates of teaching effectiveness :
i. Clarity
ii. Variability
iii. Enthusiasm
iv. Criticism
v. Students opportunity to learn criterion
vi. Use of structuring comments.
Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials

43 
 
Unit : 1
• Integration of micro teaching skill using any two types
• Writing instructional objectives on an unit of your choice
• Writing questions on a concept using the components of fluency in questioning skill
• Seminar on importance of micro teaching
Unit : 2
• Organizing small group discussions- brain storming
• Organising small group discussions- buzz
• Organizing small group discussions-panel discussion
• Project activity (in any one MOT)
Unit: 3
• Writing lesson plan using concept attainment model of teaching
• Writing lesson plan using role playing model of teaching
• Seminar on distinction between methods and models of teaching
• Seminar on families of models of teaching
Unit : 4
• Observation, analysis and interpretation of lesson using FIACS.
• Seminar on effective classroom communication
• Writing an assignment on correlates of teaching
• Discussion on barriers to communication

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 

Evaluation Procedure
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 
References

Aggarwal, J. C. Essentials of Educational Psychology, New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,1995.
Allen, D. W. and Ryan, K.A. Microteaching, Massachusetts: Addison Wesley, 1969.
Anderson, L.W. (1984) An Introduction toTime and School learning, Great Britain, Croom Helm Ltd.,
Flander, N.A. (1970) Analyzing Teaching Behaviour, Reading Massachusetts. Addision – Wesley.
Gage, N.L. and Berliner, D.C. Educational Psychology, Chicago : Rand McNally College Publishing Company ,
1975.
Hurt, H.T., Scott M.D., and McCroskey J.C. Communication in the Classroom. California : Addison Wesley
Publishing company, 1977.
Jangira, N.K. and Singh, A. Core teaching Skills – The Microteaching Approach. New Delhi : National Council
of Education Research and training,1982.
Joyce, B. and Weil, M. Models of Teaching. New Delhi : Prentice-Hall India Pvt. Ltd.,1997.
Passi, B.K. Becoming Better Teacher. Ahemadabad : Sahitya Mudranalaya, 1976.
Singh, L.C. Microteaching- An Innovative in Teacher Education. Agra : National Psychological Corporation,
1979.
Travers, R.M.W. Second Handbook of Research on Teaching. Chicago : Rand McNally college Publishing
Company, 1973.
Vanaja M., Educational Technology, New Delhi, Neelkamal publication Pvt Ltd.
 
 
 
 

44 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­5:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I)  PÀ£ÀßqÀ
48 Hours
GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ: CzsÀåAiÀÄ£ÁAvÀåzÀ°è/PÉÆøÀÄð ªÀÄÄV¸ÀĪÀµÀÖgÀ°è ¥Àæw «zÁåyð ²PÀëPÀ/²PÀëQ F PɼÀPÀAqÀªÀvÀð£ÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄßvÉÆÃgÀÄvÁÛ£É/¼É:
1. PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÉAiÀÄ ¸ÀégÀÆ¥ÀªÀ£ÀÄß ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¸Á»vÀåzÀ ¥ÀæPÁgÀUÀ¼À ¸ÀégÀÆ¥ÀªÀ£ÀÄß «ªÀj¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
2. PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ ¨sÁ¶PÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸Á»wåPÀ ªÀiË®åUÀ¼À£ÀÄß «ªÀj¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥Àæ±ÀA¹¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
3. ¨sÁ¶PÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸Á»wåPÀ zÀȶ֬ÄAzÀ ¥ÀoÀåªÀ£ÀÄß «±Éèù¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
4. ¨sÁµÁA±À ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸Á»vÁåA±ÀUÀ¼À ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉÆÃzÉÝñÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¤¢ðµÀÖPÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß gÀa¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
5. ¨sÁµÁ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸Á»vÁåA±À ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£Á PÀæªÀĪÀ£ÀÄß gÀƦ¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
WÀlPÀ 1 : PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸Á»vÀå ¸ÀégÀÆ¥À
1.1 ¨sÁµÉ – CxÀð, ªÁåSÉå ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀégÀÆ¥À, PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÉAiÀÄ gÀZÀ£É - zsÀ餪ÀiÁ zsÀé£ÀåAUÀUÀ¼ÀÄ GZÁÑgÀuÉ (¸ÁÜ£À ªÀÄvÀÄÛ «zsÁ£À C£ÀĸÀj¹)
DPÀÈwªÀiÁ, DPÀÈwªÀiÁ «zsÀUÀ¼ÀÄ, PÀ£ÀßqÀ °¦ ¸ÀégÀÆ¥À
1.2 PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¥ÀzÀgÀZÀ£É - ¸ÀA¢üUÀ¼ÀÄ (PÀ£ÀßqÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀA¸ÀÌøvÀ) PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¥ÀzÀªÀUÀðUÀ¼ÀÄ (£ÁªÀÄ¥ÀzÀ ªÀUÀð, QæAiÀiÁ¥ÀzÀ ªÀUÀð) PÀ£ÀßqÀ ªÁPÀåUÀ¼ÀÄ, ªÁPÀåzÀ
WÀlPÀUÀ¼ÀÄ, ªÁPÀåzÀ «zsÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
1.3 PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÉAiÀÄ gÀÆ¥ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ - ¥ÁæzÉòPÀ ªÀåvÁå¸ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ, ¨sÁµÁ «Ä±Àæt, PÀA¥ÀÆålgÀ°è PÀ£ÀßqÀ (£ÀÄr, §gÀºÀ, ¥ÀæPÁ±ÀPï)
1.4 ¸Á»vÀå ¥ÀæPÁgÀUÀ¼À ®PÀëtUÀ¼ÀÄ
C) ¥ÀzÀå – ªÀĺÁPÁªÀå, ¨sÁªÀVÃvÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ d£À¥ÀzÀVÃvÉ
D) UÀzÀå - ¸ÀtÚPÀvÉ, ¥Àæ§AzsÀ, fêÀ£À ZÀjvÉæ
E) £ÁlPÀ – AiÀÄPÀëUÁ£À, ¸ÀuÁÚl, zÉÆqÁØl, VÃvÀ£ÁlPÀ, ©Ã¢£ÁlPÀ
WÀlPÀ 2 : PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ ªÀiË®åUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
2.1 LwºÁ¹PÀ ªÀiË®å, ¸ÁA¸ÀÌøwPÀ ªÀiË®å, ¸ÁªÀiÁfPÀ ªÀiË®å ¸ËAzÀAiÀÄð «ÄêÀiÁA¸ÁvÀäPÀ ªÀiË®å, ±ÉÊPÀëtÂPÀ ªÀiË®å, ªÁåªÀºÁjPÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ
DqÀ½vÁvÀäPÀ ªÀiË®å
2.2 PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ ¨sÁ¶PÀ GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ - ¨sÁµÁ ¥ËærüªÉÄ (P˱À®UÀ¼À ¥Àæ¨sÀÄvÀé) ±ÉÊ°AiÀÄ£ÀÄß ¨É¼É¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ (¸Á»wåPÀ ¨sÁµÉAiÀÄ PÀ°PÉ) ¥ÀzÀ
¸ÀA¥ÀwÛ£À ªÀÈ¢Þ
2.3 PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ ¸Á»wåPÀ GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ (UÀæ»PÉ, ¥Àæ±ÀA¸É, ¸ÀÈd£À²Ã®vÉ), UÀzÀå ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ GzÉÝñÀ (PÀvÉ, ¥Àæ§AzsÀ, fêÀ£À ZÀjvÉæ), ¥ÀzÀå
¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ (PÁªÀå, ¨sÁªÀVÃvÉ, d£À¥ÀzÀ) £ÁlPÀ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ, ¥Àæ§AzsÀ, ¥ÀvÀæ¯ÉÃR£À, «¸ÀÛgÀt, ¸ÀAPÉëÃ¥ÀtUÀ¼À
¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
2.4 PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉUÉ ¸ÀA§A¢ü¹zÀAvÉ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÁvÀäPÀ GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ eÁÕ£À, w¼ÀĪÀ½PÉ, C£ÀéAiÀÄ, P˱À®UÀ¼ÀÄ, ¥Àæ±ÀA¸É ªÀÄvÀÄÛ D¸ÀQÛ
WÀlPÀ 3 : ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£Á ¸ÀA¥À£ÀÆä®UÀ¼ÀÄ
3.1 «±ÉèõÀuÉ – «ªÀıÉð – CxÀð, «ªÀıÉðAiÀÄ ¥ÀæPÁgÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ¥ÁæAiÉÆÃVPÀ «ªÀıÉð, ¸ÁªÀiÁfPÀ «ªÀıÉð, ªÀÄ£ÉÆà «±ÉèõÀuÁvÀäPÀ «ªÀıÉð –
(ªÀÄÆgÀÄ ¥ÀæPÁgÀUÀ½UÀÆ zÀȵÁÖAvÀUÀ¼ÀÄ)
3.2 ¥ÀoÀåzÀ ¸ÀégÀÆ¥À, PÁ®ªÉʲµÀÖöå, PÀvÀÈð«£À ªÀåQÛvÀé, ¸ÁªÀiÁfPÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸Á¸ÀA¸ÀÌøwPÀ »£À߯ÉAiÀÄ «ªÀgÀ
3.3 ¥ÀoÀå¨sÁUÀzÀ°è Dj¹PÉÆArgÀĪÀ ªÀ¸ÀÄÛ, CzÀgÀ PÀ®à£É, gÀ¸À, zsÀé¤, ¸ÀAzÉñÀ, PÀvÀÈð«£À ¸ÀÈd£À ²Ã®vÉAiÀÄ «ªÀgÀ
3.4 ¥ÀoÀå ¨sÁUÀzÀ°è §¼ÀPÉAiÀiÁzÀ ¨sÁµÁ ±ÉÊ°, ¯Á°vÀå, ¥ÀzÀ¥ÀÄAdUÀ¼À ¥ÀæAiÉÆÃUÀ, ¨sÁµÁ ¥ËærüªÉÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÀvÀÈð«£À ±ÉÊ°UÀ¼À «ªÀgÀ
WÀlPÀ 4 : ¨sÁµÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ««zsÀ ¸Á»vÀå ¥ÀæPÁgÀUÀ¼ÀÄ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£Á vÀAvÀæUÀ¼ÀÄ
4.1 ¥ÀzÀ/¥ÀzÀ¥ÀÄAd/£ÀÄrUÀlÄÖ – O¥ÀZÁjPÀ (£ÉÃgÀ) ªÀÄvÀÄÛ C£Ë¥ÀZÁjPÀ - ¸ÁAzÀ©üðPÀ vÀAvÀæ (avÀæ, WÀl£É, PÀvÉ, ¥ÀwæPÉ)
4.2 ªÁåPÀgÀt/bÀAzÀ¸ÀÄì/C®APÁgÀ – C£ÀÄUÀªÀÄ£À ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¤UÀªÀÄ£À
4.3 UÀzÀå ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É - ¸Á»vÀå ¥ÀæPÁgÀPÉÌ vÀPÀÌAvÉ ªÁZÀ£À PÀæªÀÄzÀ ¥ÁævÀåQëPÉ, G¥À£Áå¸À, ZÀZÉð ªÉÄðéZÁgÀPÀ CzsÀåAiÀÄ£À , ¥Àæ±ÉÆßÃvÀÛgÀ
4.4 ¥ÀzsÀå ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É - ºÁqÀÄUÁjPÉ/UÀªÀÄPÀ ªÁZÀ£À, ªÀ¸ÀÄÛ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¨sÁªÁA±À ¥Àæ±ÀA¸É - ¨sÁªÁ£ÀĪÁzÀ gÀZÀ£É ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÀAoÀ¥ÁoÀ
4.5 £ÁlPÀ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É - £ÁlQÃPÀgÀt, ¥ÁvÀæ ºÀAaPÉ - ¸ÀA¨sÁµÀuÉ PÀ°PÉ, C©ü£ÀAiÀÄ, £ÁlPÀ «ªÀıÉð, (¨ÁAiÉÄÝgÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ °TvÀ)
4.6 ¥Àæ§AzsÀ, UÁzÉ, ¨sÁªÀ «¸ÀÛgÀuÉ, ¸ÀAPÉë¥ÀuÉUÀ¼À ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É - ¨ÁAiÉÄÝgÉ ZÀZÉð ªÀÄvÀÄÛ °TvÀ gÀÆ¥ÀPÉÌ ¸À®ºÉ
lÆåmÉÆÃjAiÀįï/«ZÁgÀ ¸ÀAQgÀt/ ¸É«Ä£Ágï/¥ÁæQÑPÀ¯ïì :
WÀlPÀ 1 :
• zsÀé¤ - CPÀëgÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¤Ãr GZÁÑgÀuÁ ¸ÁÜ£À ªÀÄvÀÄÛ «zsÁ£ÀzÀ «ªÀgÀuÉPÉÆqÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
• MvÀÛgÀPÀëgÀUÀ½gÀĪÀ CPÀëgÀUÀ¼À GZÁÑgÀtUÀÆ §gÀºÀPÀÆÌ EgÀĪÀ ªÀåvÁå¸ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
• PÀ£ÀßqÀzÀ°è ¸ÀA¸ÀÌøvÀ ¥ÀzÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß §gÉAiÀÄĪÁUÀ ªÀiÁqÀĪÀ zÉÆõÀUÀ¼ÀÄ – wzÀÄݪÀ PÀæªÀÄ
• ¸ÀA¸ÀÌøvÀ, »AzÀƸÁÛ¤, ¥ÉÆÃZÀÄðVøï, ¥ÁæPÀÈvÀ ¨sÁµÉ¬ÄAzÀ §AzÀ ±À§ÝUÀ¼À ¸ÀAUÀæºÀ (ªÀVÃðPÀgÀt) ®PÀëtUÀ¼À «ªÀgÀ
• ¨sÁµÁ «Ä±Àæt £ÀqÉAiÀÄĪÀ §UÉ ªÀiÁr «ªÀgÀuÉ

45 
 
• PÀ£ÀßqÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ EvÀgÀ zÁæ«qÀ ¨sÁµÉUÀ¼ÉÆA¢V£À ¸ÀA§AzsÀ
• ºÀ¼ÉUÀ£ÀßqÀ, £ÀqÀÄUÀ£ÀßqÀ, ºÉƸÀUÀ£ÀßqÀ - ¸Á»vÀå gÀÆ¥ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
• £ÀªÉÇÃzÀAiÀÄ, £ÀªÀå, ¥ÀæUÀw²Ã®, zÀ°vÀ, §AqÁAiÀÄ ¸Á»vÀåUÀ¼À ®PÀëtUÀ¼ÀÄ
WÀlPÀ 2 :
• PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¥ÁæaãÀvÉ
• ‘ªÀiÁvÀȨsÁµÉAiÉÄà ²PÀët ªÀiÁzsÀåªÀÄ’ ZÀZÉð/ªÁzÀ
• ±Á¹ÛçÃAiÀÄ ¨sÁµÉAiÀiÁV PÀ£ÀßqÀ
• eÁUÀwÃPÀgÀtzÀ »£É߯ÉAiÀÄ°è – PÀ£ÀßqÀ
• ¥ÀoÀå ¤Ãr - ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÁvÀäPÀ GzÉÝñÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¤¢üðµÀÖPÀUÀ¼À gÀZÀ£É
• DqÀ½vÀzÀ°è PÀ£ÀßqÀ §¼ÀPÉ – ZÀZÉð
WÀlPÀ 3 :
• ¥ÁæAiÉÆÃVPÀ, ¸ÁªÀiÁfPÀ, ªÀÄ£ÉÆêÉÊeÁÕ¤PÀ «ªÀıÉðUÉ – vÀ¯Á MAzÀÄ UÀzÀå ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀzÀå zÀȵÁÖAvÀ §¼À¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ.
• ¥ÀzÀå / UÀzÀå ¥ÁoÀ DAiÀÄÄÝ ¤Ãr
C) ¸ÁªÀiÁfPÀ ¸ÁªÀĸÀÌøwPÀ »£Àß¯É «±ÉèõÀuÉ
D) ªÀ¸ÀÄÛ – «±ÉèõÀuÉ
E) ¨sÁµÁ «±ÉèõÀuÉ
F) PÀÈwPÁgÀ£À ¸ÀÈd£À ²Ã®vÉ
• £ÁlPÀ - ¥ÁvÀæ avÀæt – «ªÀıÉð, ¸À¤ßªÉñÀ avÀæt – «ªÀıÉð
• ¸ÁzsÁgÀt ¸À¤ßªÉñÀ£ÀUÀ¼À° §¼ÀPÉAiÀiÁUÀĪÀ ¨sÁµÉUÀÆ ¸Á»vÀåzÀ ¨sÁµÉUÀÆ EgÀĪÀ CAvÀgÀ vÉÆÃgÀĪÀ GzÁºÀgÀuÉUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥Àæ±ÀA¸É
WÀlPÀ 4 :
• £ÀÄrØUÀlÄÖUÀ¼À ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É, (¸ÁAzÀ©üðPÀ vÀAvÀæ §¼À¹)
• GZÁÑgÀ ¸ÁªÀÄå «zÀÄÝ CxÀð ªÀåvÁå¸À«gÀĪÀ ¥ÀzÀUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¸ÀAUÀ滹 - NzÀĪÀÅzÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ CxÉÊð¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
• ««zsÀ ¥ÀævÀåAiÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ G¥À¸ÀUÀ𠧼À¹ ¥ÀzÀgÀZÀ£É
• ªÁPÀåªÀÈAzÀ ¤Ãr CxÀð §zÀ°¸ÀzÉ - ¥ÀzÀ §zÀ¯Á¬Ä¹ ºÉüÀĪÀÅzÀÄ / §gÉAiÀÄĪÀÅzÀÄ
• ¥ÀzÀå ¤Ãr / £ÁlPÀ ¨sÁUÀ ¤Ãr ªÁa¸À®Ä ºÉý »AªÀiÁ»w ¤ÃqÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
• UÁzÉ/PÀ« ªÀiÁvÀÄ ¤Ãr - ¨sÁªÀ «¸ÀÛgÀuÉ ªÀiÁr §gÉAiÀÄ®Ä ºÉüÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
• ¯ÉÃR£À ¤Ãr ¸ÀAPÉëÃ¥Àt ªÀiÁr¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 

¥ÀgÁªÀıÀð£À ¸À®ºÉ :
1. J¸ï. gÀAUÀ£Áxï ±ÀªÀÄð; (1977) PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¸Á»vÀå ¥ÀjµÀvÀÄÛ, ZÁªÀÄgÁd ¥ÉÃmÉ, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ.
2. ¨sÁgÀwÃAiÀÄ ¨sÁµÉUÀ¼À PÉÃAzÀæ ¸ÀA¸ÉÜ – PÀ£ÀßqÀ ±ÉÊ° PÉʦr-ªÉÄʸÀÆgÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ PÀ£ÀßqÀ «±Àé«zÁ央AiÀÄ, ºÀA¦ ¸ÀAAiÀÄÄPÀÛ ¥ÀæPÀluÉ.
3. PÉ. «. £ÁgÁAiÀÄt, ¨sÁµÉAiÀÄ ¸ÀÄvÀÛ ªÀÄÄvÀÛ PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¸ÀAWÀ PÉæöʸïÖ PÁ¯ÉÃeï, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ.
4. f. ªÉAPÀl¸ÀħâAiÀÄå, EUÉÆà PÀ£ÀßqÀ, £ÀªÀPÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ.
5. ‘PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¸ÀA¥ÀzÀ’ ;(2008) gÁdå ²PÀët ¸ÀA±ÉÆÃzsÀ£É ªÀÄvÀÄÛ vÀgÀ¨ÉÃw ¤zÉÃð±À£Á®AiÀÄ, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ.
6. ¨sÁgÀwÃAiÀÄ ¨sÁµÉUÀ¼À PÉÃAzÀæ ¸ÀA¸ÉÜ ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À C) ªÉÆzÀ® ºÉeÉÓ D) ¸Àj ºÉeÉÓ E) ºÉƸÀ ºÉeÉÓ F) ¤gÀAvÀgÀ G) ¸ÀªÀÄPÁ°Ã£À
7. ©.«. gÀªÀÄt, PÀ£ÀßqÀ £ÀÄr ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É
8. qÁ. PÉ. PÉA¥ÉÃUËqÀ, ‘¨sÁµÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¨sÁµÁ «eÁÕ£À’ ¨sÁgÀw ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À ¸ÀgÀ¸Àéw ¥ÀÄgÀA, ªÉÄʸÀÆgÀÄ
9. C£À¸ÀÆAiÀÄ «. ¥ÀgÀV,( 2005) ‘ªÀiÁvÀÈ ¨sÁµÁ PÀ£ÀßqÀ vÀvÀé ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£Á ªÀiÁUÀð’, «ªÉÃPÀ ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À, aPÀ̧¼Áî¥ÀÄgÀ.
10. r. J£ï. ±ÀAPÀgÀ ¨sÀlÖ; (1978) ( C) ‘PÀ£ÀßqÀ ªÁPÀåUÀ¼ÀÄ’ (D) PÀ£ÀßqÀ ±À§Ý gÀZÀ£É VÃvÁ §ÄPï ºË¸ï ªÉÄʸÀÆgÀÄ.
11. gÁ. C£ÀAvÀgÁªÀÄÄ;( 1971) PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÁ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É, ZÉÃvÀ£À §ÄPï ºË¸ï ªÉÄʸÀÆgÀÄ.
12. PÉ. ¸ÀaÑzÁ£ÀAzÀAiÀÄå ‘PÀ£ÀßrAiÀÄ PÀ°PÉ’
13. qÁ|| PÉ.J¯ï. UÉÆÃ¥Á® PÀȵÀÚAiÀÄå ‘¥ËæqsÀ±Á¯Á PÀ£ÀßqÀ PÉʦr, £ÀªÀPÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ
14. ªÀĺÉñÀégÀAiÀÄå JZï. JA. - ¨sÁµÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸ÀÈd£À ²Ã®vÉ, ¸ÀA»vÁ ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À, zsÁgÀªÁqÀ
15. w.£ÀA. ²æÃPÀAoÀAiÀÄå – PÀ£ÀßqÀ ªÀÄzsÀåªÀÄ ªÁåPÀgÀt, ¨sÁgÀwÃAiÀÄ PÁªÀå «ÄêÀiÁA¸É
16. £ÁgÁAiÀÄt PÉ.«. ¢£À¢£À - ¥Àæ¸ÁgÁAUÀ, PÀ£ÀßqÀ «±Àé«zÁ央AiÀÄ ºÀA¦

46 
 
17. ¸Á.². ªÀÄgÀļÀAiÀÄå – PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÉAiÀÄ ZÀjvÉæ – PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¸Á»vÀå ¥ÀjµÀvï ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ
18. JA.«. £ÁUÀgÁdgÁªï ; (1999) CgÀªÀvÀÄÛ ºÉeÉÓUÀ¼À°è ±ÀÄzÀÞ PÀ£ÀßqÀ.
19. ²æÃzsÀgï J¸ï.J£ï. – EA¢£À PÀ£ÀßqÀ; gÀZÀ£É ªÀÄvÀÄÛ §¼ÀPÉ; ¥Àæ¸ÁgÁAUÀ, PÀ£ÀßqÀ «±Àé«zÁ央AiÀÄ, ºÀA¦
20. ¥ÀæºÁèzÀgÁªï - ¯ÉÃR£À PÀ¯É
21. ªÀȵÀ¨ÉÃAzÀæ ¸Áé«Ä - §gÉAiÀÄĪÀ zÁj
22. C.gÁ. «ÄvÀæ – bÀAzÉÆëÄvÀæ
23. qÁ|| ªÀĺÁ§¯ÉñÀégÀ gÁªï;(1996) ¥ËæqsÀ±Á¯ÉUÀ¼À°è PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É £ÀªÀ PÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ.
24. ¥ÉÆæ|| JA.J£ï;( 2006) ºÉUÀqÉ ‘PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÁ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É - ¥ÀæxÀªÀÄ, ¢éwÃAiÀÄ ¸É«Ä¸ÀÖgï ¥Àæ¢Ã¥À ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À UÀzÀUÀ.
25. PÁ²£ÁxÀ JZï.JA. EvÀgÀgÀÄ – ‘¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£Á ªÀiÁzÀjUÀ¼ÀÄ’ – qÉ¥ÀÆål ZÀ£Àߧ¸À¥Àà, ¥ÁæxÀ«ÄPÀ ²PÀët ¥ÀæwµÁ×£À, zsÁgÀªÁqÀ
JA. azÁ£ÀAzÀ ªÀÄÆwð – PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÁ«eÁÕ£ÀzÀ ªÀÄÆ® vÀvÀéUÀ¼ÀÄ
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

47 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­5:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
ÌWÇûSÏ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ mÉSèkÉÌiÉ
* E¬åzrÉ : oÉÏ.LQû. Måü ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ mÉSèkÉÌiÉ CxÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉ Måü ÍsÉL ÌlÉkÉÉïËUiÉ mÉÉPèûrÉuÉxiÉÑ Måü AkrÉrÉlÉ mÉÔÌiÉï
Måü EmÉUÉliÉ NûɧÉÉkrÉÉmÉMü ÌlÉqlÉÍsÉÎZÉiÉ rÉÉåarÉiÉÉAÉåÇ MüÉå mÉëÉmiÉ MüUåÇaÉå –                  48 bÉÇOåû
¾ ÌWÇûSÏ pÉÉwÉÉ MüÉ ESèpÉuÉ LuÉÇ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ Måü oÉÉUå qÉåÇ eÉÉlÉMüÉUÏ mÉëÉmiÉ MüUåÇaÉå |
¾ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ lÉÏÌiÉ MüÉå xÉqÉfÉåÇaÉå |
¾ ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ Måü ÌuÉÍpÉ³É E¬åzrÉÉåÇ MüÐ eÉÉlÉMüÉUÏ mÉëÉmiÉ MüUåÇaÉå |
¾ pÉÉwÉÉ MüÉæzÉsÉÉåÇ Måü oÉÉUå qÉåÇ ¥ÉÉlÉ mÉëÉmiÉ MüUåÇaÉå |
¾ ÌuÉÍpÉ³É mÉÉPûrÉÉåeÉlÉÉAÉåÇ Måü xuÉÃmÉ MüÉå xÉqÉfÉåÇaÉå |
¾ ÍzɤÉhÉ ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉåÇ AÉæU mÉëÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉåÇ MüÉ mÉërÉÉåaÉ MüU xÉMåÇüaÉå |
¾ AlÉÑSåzÉlÉÉiqÉMü xÉÉqÉÌaÉërÉÉåÇ MüÉ mÉëpÉÉuÉÏ RÇûaÉ xÉå mÉërÉÉåaÉ MüU xÉMåÇüaÉå |
¾ mÉÉPèûrÉxÉWûaÉÉqÉÏ Ì¢ürÉÉAÉåÇ Måü oÉÉUå qÉåÇ eÉÉlÉMüÉUÏ mÉëÉmiÉ MüUåÇaÉå |
¾ qÉÔsrÉÉÇMülÉ MüÐ ÌuÉÌpÉ³É ÌuÉÍkÉAÉåÇ Måü oÉÉUå qÉåÇ eÉÉlÉMüÉUÏ mÉëÉmiÉ MüUåÇaÉå |
¾ pÉÉuÉÏ ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉMü Måü ÍsÉL iÉærÉÉU WûÉåÇaÉå |

bÉOûMü 1 : ÌWÇûSÏ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ lÉÏÌiÉ AÉæU ÍzɤÉhÉ E¬åzrÉ


1.1 pÉÉwÉÉ : AjÉï, mÉËUpÉÉwÉÉ, mÉëM×üÌiÉ, oÉÉsÉMü Måü ÌuÉMüÉxÉ qÉåÇ pÉÉwÉÉ MüÐ pÉÔÍqÉMüÉ
1.2 ÌWÇûSÏ pÉÉwÉÉ MüÉ ESèpÉuÉ LuÉÇ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ
1.3 pÉÉUiÉ MüÐ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ lÉÏÌiÉ : ̧ÉpÉÉwÉÉ xÉÔ§É, ÌWÇûSÏ MüÐ SzÉÉ AÉæU ÌSzÉÉ : UÉ·íÏrÉ AÉæU AÇiÉUÉï·íÏrÉ xiÉU mÉU
1.4 E¬åzrÉÉåÇ MüÉ ÌuÉzsÉåwÉhÉ: ¥ÉÉlÉÉiqÉMü, MüÉæzÉsÉÉiqÉMü, UxÉÉiqÉMü, xÉ×eÉlÉÉiqÉMü,
AÍpÉuÉ×irÉÉiqÉMü, iÉ×iÉÏrÉ pÉÉwÉÉ ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ Måü E¬åzrÉ
bÉOûMü 2 : pÉÉwÉÉrÉÏ MüÉæzÉsÉÉåÇ MüÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ
2.1 ´ÉuÉhÉ MüÉæzÉsÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, ÌuÉMüÉxÉ WåûiÉÑ Ì¢ürÉÉLÆ
2.2 qÉÉæÎZÉMü AÍpÉurÉÌ£ü MüÉæzÉsÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, ÌuÉMüÉxÉ WåûiÉÑ Ì¢ürÉÉLÆ, qÉÉæÎZÉMü
AÍpÉurÉÌ£ü qÉåÇ §ÉÑÌOûrÉÉð LuÉÇ ElÉMüÉ ÌlÉUÉMüUhÉ
2.3 uÉÉcÉlÉ MüÉæzÉsÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, uÉÉcÉlÉ Måü mÉëMüÉU, ÌuÉMüÉxÉ WåûiÉÑ Ì¢ürÉÉLÆ, uÉÉcÉlÉ qÉåÇ
§ÉÑÌOûrÉÉð
2.4 sÉåZÉlÉ MüÉæzÉsÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, sÉåZÉlÉ Måü mÉëMüÉU, sÉåZÉlÉ qÉåÇ §ÉÑÌOûrÉÉð Måü MüÉUhÉ,
xÉÑkÉÉUlÉå Måü EmÉÉrÉ

bÉOûMü 3 : mÉÉPûrÉÉåeÉlÉÉ
3.1 mÉÉPûrÉÉåeÉlÉÉ : mÉËUpÉÉwÉÉ, AÉuÉzrÉMüiÉÉ, ÌuÉzÉåwÉiÉÉLÆ, ÌlÉUÇiÉU qÉÔsrÉÉÇMülÉ Måü AÉkÉÉU mÉU
mÉÉPû rÉÉåeÉlÉÉ (CCE). AjÉï, E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, ÃmÉUåZÉÉ
3.2 xÉÔ¤qÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ : xÉÔ¤qÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ MüÐ mÉëÌ¢ürÉÉ, mÉrÉïuÉå¤ÉMü MüÐ pÉÔÍqÉMüÉ,
MüÉæzÉsÉÉåÇ MüÉ mÉËUcÉrÉ, xÉÔ¤qÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ MüÐ mÉërÉÉåaÉzÉÉsÉÉ, xÉÔ¤qÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ mÉÉPû rÉÉåeÉlÉÉ
3.3 CMüÉD rÉÉåeÉlÉÉ : qÉWûiuÉ, xuÉÃmÉ, SæÌlÉMü mÉÉPûrÉÉåeÉlÉÉ AÉæU CMüÉD rÉÉåeÉlÉÉ qÉåÇ AÇiÉU,
3.4 mÉÉPûrÉ¢üqÉ ÌlÉqÉÉïhÉ Måü iÉiuÉ, mÉÉPûrÉ¢üqÉ UcÉlÉÉ MüÐ mÉSèkÉÌiÉrÉÉð, mÉÉPûrÉ¢üqÉ MüÐ
ÌuÉzÉåwÉiÉÉLÆ, mÉÉPûrÉmÉÑxiÉMü MüÐ EmÉrÉÉåÌaÉiÉÉ, xuÉÃmÉ : AkrÉrÉlÉ mɤÉ, ÃmÉÉiqÉMü mɤÉ

bÉOûMü 4 : xÉÉÌWûÎirÉMü ÌuÉkÉÉAÉåÇ MüÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ

48 
 
4.1 aɱ ÍzɤÉhÉ : mÉëqÉÑZÉ ÌuÉkÉÉLÆ, E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, mÉëhÉÉÍsÉrÉÉð
4.2 mɱ ÍzɤÉhÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, mÉëhÉÉÍsÉrÉÉð, MüÉurÉÉiqÉMü AÍpÉÃÍcÉ oÉRûÉlÉå Måü xÉÉkÉlÉ
4.3 urÉÉMüUhÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, urÉÉMüUhÉ Måü mÉëMüÉU, mÉëhÉÉÍsÉrÉÉð
4.4 UcÉlÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, UcÉlÉÉ Måü pÉåS, mÉëhÉÉÍsÉrÉÉð

mÉëS¨É MüÉrÉï / mÉëÉirÉͤÉMü MüÉrÉï


bÉOûMü 1 :
• pÉÉUiÉÏrÉ eÉlÉ eÉÏuÉlÉ qÉåÇ ÌWÇûSÏ
• xÉÇmÉMïü pÉÉwÉÉ LuÉÇ UÉeÉpÉÉwÉÉ Måü ÃmÉ qÉåÇ ÌWÇûSÏ
• ÌWÇûSÏ Måü mÉëcÉÉU-mÉëxÉÉU MüÐ xÉÇxjÉÉLÆ
• oÉÉsÉMü Måü pÉÉwÉÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ mÉU xÉÏ.QûÏ. ÌlÉqÉÉïhÉ AÉæU AuÉsÉÉåMülÉ
bÉOûMü 2 :
• pÉÉwÉÉ MüÉæzÉsÉÉåÇ Måü ÌuÉMüÉxÉ qÉåÇ mÉëcÉÍsÉiÉ LuÉÇ mÉëpÉÉÌuÉiÉ eÉlÉxÉÇcÉÉU qÉÉkrÉqÉÉåÇ MüÉ rÉÉåaÉSÉlÉ (xÉqÉÉcÉÉU mɧÉ, SÕUSzÉïlÉ,
AÉMüÉzÉuÉÉhÉÏ, ÌuÉ¥ÉÉmÉlÉ, xÉÇaÉhÉMü)
• ´ÉuÉhÉ MüÉæzÉsÉ AÉæU sÉåZÉlÉ MüÉæzÉsÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ WåûiÉÑ Ì¢ürÉÉLÆ
• uÉiÉïlÉÏ SÉåwÉÉåÇ MüÉ xÉÇMüsÉlÉ AÉæU ElÉMåü ÍsÉL EmÉcÉÉUÉiqÉMü AprÉÉxÉ MüÐ UcÉlÉÉ
• qÉÑWûÉuÉUåÇ, MüWûÉuÉiÉåÇ AÉæU sÉÉåMüÉåÌ£ürÉÉåÇ MüÉ xÉÇMüsÉlÉ (AjÉï ÌuÉzsÉåwÉhÉ xÉÌWûiÉ)

bÉOûMü 3 :
• ÌMülWûÏÇ SÉå MüÉæzÉsÉÉåÇ Måü bÉOûMüÉåÇ MüÉ mÉËUcÉrÉ
• xÉÔ¤qÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ mÉërÉÉåaÉzÉÉsÉÉ MüÐ urÉuÉxjÉÉ
• ÌlÉUÇiÉU qÉÔsrÉÉÇMülÉ Måü AÉkÉÉU mÉU mÉÉPû rÉÉåeÉlÉÉ MüÉ ÌlÉqÉÉïhÉ
• CMüÉD mÉÉPû rÉÉåeÉlÉÉ MüÉ ÌlÉqÉÉïhÉ
bÉOûMü 4 :
• xÉÉÌWûÎirÉMü ÌuÉkÉÉAÉåÇ MüÉ mÉËUcÉrÉ – lÉÉOûMü, LMüÉÇMüÐ, MüWûÉlÉÏ, ÌlÉoÉÇkÉ, eÉÏuÉlÉÏ, AÉiqÉMüijÉÉ
• AÉkÉÑÌlÉMü xÉÉÌWûirÉMüÉU MüÉ mÉËUcÉrÉ
• AÇirÉɤÉUÏ / lÉÉOûMü MüÉ AÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ
• urÉÉMüUhÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ qÉåÇ xÉÏ.QûÏ. MüÉ mÉërÉÉåaÉ

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                        20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 

49 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­5:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 

qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉkSiÉÏ


48 iÉÉxÉ
* E̬¹rÉå : oÉÏ.LQû. crÉÉ qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉkSiÉÏ rÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉÉxÉÉPûÏ ÌlÉkÉÉïËUiÉ mÉÉPèûrÉ¢üqÉÉcrÉÉ AkrÉrÉlÉÉ
lÉÇiÉU ÌuɱÉjÉÏï-ÍzɤÉMü ZÉÉsÉÏsÉ rÉÉåarÉiÉÉ mÉëÉmiÉ MüUiÉÏsÉ –
¾ pÉÉwÉå qÉÑVåû urÉÌ£üiuÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ WûÉåiÉÉå Wåû eÉÉhÉÔlÉ bÉåiÉÏsÉ.
¾ AqÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉÌwÉMü ÌuɱÉjrÉÉïÇxÉÉPûÏ qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉåcÉå qÉWûiuÉ xÉqÉeÉÑlÉ bÉåiÉÏsÉ.
¾ pÉÉwÉÉ MüÉæzÉsrÉÉÇcrÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉÏ qÉÉÌWûiÉÏ MüÃlÉ bÉåiÉÏsÉ.
¾ qÉUÉPûÏ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉÇcÉÏ E̬¹rÉå xÉqÉeÉÑlÉ bÉåiÉÏsÉ.
¾ mÉÉPû ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉÉÇcÉÉ AÉUÉZÉQûÉ xÉqÉeÉÑlÉ bÉåiÉÏsÉ.
¾ qÉUÉPûÏ ÌuÉwÉrÉÉcrÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉÇxÉÉPûÏ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉkSiÉÏ uÉ mÉërÉÑYirÉÉ xÉqÉeÉÑlÉ bÉåiÉÏsÉ.
¾ qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcrÉÉ xÉÉkÉlÉ xÉÉÌWûirÉÉÇcÉÉ EmÉrÉÉåaÉ Müà zÉMüiÉÏsÉ.
¾ qÉÔsrÉqÉÉmÉlÉÉÇcÉå mÉëMüÉU, E¬åzrÉ xÉqÉeÉÑ zÉMüiÉÏsÉ.
¾ qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉåcÉÉ ÍzɤÉMü WûÉåhrÉÉxÉÉPûÏcÉÏ mÉɧÉiÉÉ ÍqÉVûuÉÔ zÉMüiÉÏsÉ.

bÉOûMü 1 : qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉåcÉå qÉWûiuÉ


1.1 pÉÉwÉÉ : AjÉï, SælÉÇÌSlÉ eÉÏuÉlÉÉiÉÏsÉ pÉÉwÉåcÉå qÉWûiuÉ
1.2 pÉÉwÉÉ AÉÍhÉ urÉÌ£üiuÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ (oÉÉæήMü, pÉÉuÉÌlÉMü, xÉÉqÉÉÎeÉMü, xÉÉÌWûÎirÉMü)
1.3 AqÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉÌwÉMü ÌuɱÉjÉÉïÇcrÉÉ eÉÏuÉlÉÉiÉÏsÉ qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉåcÉå qÉWûiuÉ
1.4 qÉUÉPûÏ AÉÍhÉ CiÉU pÉÉwÉåÇcÉÉ xÉWûxÉÇoÉÇkÉ

bÉOûMü 2 : pÉÉwÉÉ MüÉæzÉsrÉÉÇcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ


2.1 ´ÉuÉhÉ MüÉæzÉsrÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, ÌuÉMüÉxÉ xÉÇoÉÇkÉÏ Ì¢ürÉÉ MüsÉÉmÉ
2.2 qÉÉæÎZÉMü AÍpÉurÉÌ£ü MüÉæzÉsrÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, ÌuÉMüÉxÉ xÉÇoÉÇkÉÏ Ì¢ürÉÉ MüsÉÉmÉ
2.3 uÉÉcÉlÉ MüÉæzÉsrÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, mÉëMüÉU, ÌuÉMüÉxÉ xÉÇoÉÇkÉÏ Ì¢ürÉÉ MüsÉÉmÉ
2.4 sÉåZÉlÉ MüÉæzÉsrÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, ÌuÉMüÉxÉ xÉÇoÉÇkÉÏ Ì¢ürÉÉ MüsÉÉmÉ

bÉOûMü 3 : qÉUÉPûÏ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcÉÏ E̬¹rÉå uÉ mÉÉPû ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ


3.1 qÉUÉPûÏ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcÉÏ krÉårÉå, E̬¹rÉå (¥ÉÉlÉ, AÉMüsÉlÉ, EmÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ, MüÉæzÉsrÉ, mÉëMüOûÏMüUhÉ, AÍpÉÃcÉÏ, UxÉaÉëWûhÉ)
3.2 mÉÉPûÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉÉcÉÏ AÉuÉzrÉMüiÉÉ, xÉiÉiÉ qÉÔsrÉÉÇMülÉÉ xÉÉPûÏ mÉÉPû ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ (CCE): AjÉï, E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, AÉUÉZÉQûÉ
3.3 xÉÔ¤qÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ: MüÉæzÉsrÉÉÇcÉÏ AÉåVûZÉ, xÉÔ¤qÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ mÉÉPû ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ
3.4 qÉUÉPûÏ : mÉëjÉqÉ pÉÉwÉÉ, ̲iÉÏrÉ pÉÉwÉÉ

bÉOûMü 4 : qÉUÉPûÏcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ uÉ ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ


4.1 aɱ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉkSiÉÏ
4.2 mɱ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉkSiÉÏ
4.3 urÉÉMüUhÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉkSiÉÏ
4.4 mÉÉPû ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉûlÉÉcÉÉ AÉUÉZÉÄQûÉ

50 
 
S¨É MüÉrÉï / mÉëÉirÉͤÉMü MüÉrÉï / ¤Éå§É AkrÉrÉlÉ / mÉËUxÉÇuÉÉS / mÉëzlÉ
bÉOûMü 1 :
• pÉÉUiÉÏrÉ xÉÇÌuÉkÉÉlÉ qÉkrÉå qÉUÉPûÏcÉå xjÉÉlÉ rÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉÏ ÍsÉWûÉ.
• ÍzɤÉhÉÉiÉÏsÉ qÉÉiÉ×pÉÉwÉåcÉå xjÉÉlÉ rÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉÏ cÉcÉÉï MüUÉ.
• pÉÉwÉåqÉÑVåû WûÉåhÉÉîrÉÉ urÉÌ£üiuÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉÉcÉå mÉUϤÉhÉ (oÉÉæήMü uÉ pÉÉuÉÌlÉMü) MüÃlÉ qÉÉÌWûiÉÏ xÉÇaÉëÌWûiÉ MüUÉ.
bÉOûMü 2 :
• pÉÉwÉÉ MüÉæzÉsrÉÉÇcrÉÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉÉqÉkrÉå xÉqÉÔWû xÉÇmÉMïü qÉÉkrÉqÉÉÇcÉÉ WûÉiÉ pÉÉU (sÉÉåMüMüsÉÉ, lÉpÉÉåuÉÉhÉÏ, eÉÉÌWûUÉiÉÏ, uÉרÉmɧÉå,
ÍcɧÉmÉOû SÕUÍcɧÉuÉÉhÉÏ) rÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉÏ cÉcÉÉï MüUÉ.
• qWûhÉÏ, uÉÉYrÉmÉëcÉÉU, (AjÉï ÌuÉzsÉåwÉhÉ xÉÌWûiÉ) AsÉÇMüÉU, NÇûS rÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉÏ qÉÉÌWûiÉÏ xÉÇaÉëÌWûiÉ MüUÉ.
• ÌuÉUÉqÉ ÍcÉlWÉÇcÉÉû EmÉrÉÉåaÉ - S¨É MüÉrÉï ÍsÉWûÉ.
bÉOûMü 3 :
• MüÉåhÉirÉÉWûÏ SÉålÉ MüÉæzÉsrÉÉÇcÉÏ AÉåVûZÉ – rÉÉ uÉUiÉÏ mÉËUxÉÇuÉÉSÉcÉå AÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ MüUÉ.
• xÉÔ¤qÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcÉÏ mÉërÉÉåaÉzÉÉVûÉ - S¨É MüÉrÉï ÍsÉWûÉ.
• ÌlÉUÇiÉU qÉÔsrÉqÉÉmÉlÉ mÉÉPû ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉÏ cÉcÉÉï MüUÉ.
bÉOûMü 4 :
• xÉÉÌWûÎirÉMü mÉËUcÉrÉ – ÌlÉoÉÇkÉ, lÉÉOûMü, MüjÉÉ, AÉiqÉMüjÉÉ, MüÉSÇoÉUÏ rÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉÏ ÌuÉxiÉ×iÉ qÉÉÌWûiÉÏ ±É.
• AÉkÉÑÌlÉMü qÉUÉPûÏ xÉÉÌWûirÉMüÉUÉcÉÏ qÉÑsÉÉZÉiÉ bÉåFlÉ AÉsÉåZÉ iÉrÉÉU MüUÉ.
• urÉÉMüUhÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉxÉÉPûÏ xÉÏ.QûÏ cÉÉ EmÉrÉÉåaÉ MüxÉÉ MüUÉsÉ ? mÉëxiÉÑiÉ MüUÉ.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
   

                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 

51 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­5:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 

PHYSICAL SCIENCE

Objectives: Upon completion of the course the student teacher will be able to: 48 Hours
1. Understand the nature, scope and importance of physical science with special reference to secondary
school content.
2. Understand the aims and objectives of teaching physical science
3. State the specific behavioural changes under each objective.
4. Understand and make use of different approaches & methods of teaching physical science.
5. Prepare objective based lesson plans and use them in their practice teaching.
6. Understand and employ several teaching techniques helpful to develop scientific attitude and scientific
method.
7. Plan, use and maintain the physical science laboratory systematically
8. Understand the principles of text-book construction.
9. Understand the importance of appropriate instructional materials (hardwares and soft wares) in
teaching physical teaching.
10. Understand the importance of principles of curriculum construction in the organisation of physical
science contact.
11. Get mastery in physical science content and imbibe the special qualities of physical science teacher.
12. Prepare and use different tools of evaluation to assess the achievements of students in physical science.
13. Develop professionally by attending lectures of professional interest, reading journals, magazines and
enrol as members of professional organisation.
14. Organise co-curricular activities in science i.e. seminars, field trips, exhibitions discussions etc through
the science club.
15. Apply the knowledge of physical science to develop scientific thinking and scientific out look
16. Develop skills in analyzing the content in terms of concepts and in learning experiences.
17. Construct and administer unit test, conduct experiments improves teaching aids.

Unit 1: Introduction to Physical Science Teaching


1.1. Physical science : Concept nature and scope and science as a process and product.
1.2. Impact of physical science on human welfare
1.3. Scientific Method : Meaning steps and illustrations
1.4. Scientific attitude : Meaning importance, Qualities and Role of Teacher in developing scientific attitude

Unit 2: Aims and Objectives of Teaching Physical Science


2.1 Disciplinary Aim
2.2 Utilitarian Aim
2.3 Cultural Aim
2.4 Objectives : Instructional objectives of teaching physical science – knowledge, understanding,
skill and application, and stating the specific behavioural changes under each objectives.

Unit 3 : Lesson plan in Teaching Physical Science


3.1 Lesson Plan : Meaning, definition characteristics of good lesson plan & Advantages & disadvantages.
3.2 Unit plan : Meaning, definition characteristics of good unit plan & Advantages & disadvantages.
3.3 Resource unit : Meaning, definition, steps, characteristics, Advantages & disadvantages of resource unit.
3.4 Differences between unit plan & Lesson plan

Unit 4: Approaches and Methods of Teaching Physical Science


4.1 Inductive and deductive approaches.
4.2 Demonstration method
4.3 Laboratory method

52 
 
4.4 Project method
4.5 Problem solving method
4.6 Heuristic method (Meaning, steps, advantages & disadvantages with respect above methods).

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit -1
• Visit and write a report on museum / industries / laboratories / hospitals etc. to inculcate scientific
attitude.
• Contribution of Indian scientist in the field of physical science.

Unit -2
• Seminar on inculcation of scientific values
• Writing instructional objectives in observable behavioural changes ( Bloom / NCERT).

Unit -3
• Preparation of resource unit ( group wise ).

Unit -4
• Preparing a model lesson plan based on CCE format & teaching by role play / integration with
technology.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 

53 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­5:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
SANSKRIT 
Objectives – Upon completion of the course the student‐teacher will be able to : 48 hours 
1. Understand the importance of Sanskrit language and its contribution to Indian culture and emotional 
integration. 
2. Understand the aims and objectives of teaching Sanskrit and state them in the  Form of specific behavioral  
changes. 
3. Prepare objectives based lesson plans and implement them. 
4. Understand the basic skills of language learning. 
5. Understand the principles of curriculum construction of Sanskrit. 
6. Understand the different methods of teaching Sanskrit and use them in his Practice teaching lessons. 
7. Understand the importance of appropriate instructional materials and co‐curricular activities and use them 
in his practice teaching lessons. 
8. Understand the importance of Evaluation, prepare and use different tools of evaluation in language 
learning. 
9. Imbibe the special qualities of Sanskrit teacher. 
 
Unit‐I Sanskrit language – Nature & Place of Sanskrit in the Secondary School   Curriculum       
1.1 Historical Background of Sanskrit Language. 
1.2 Contribution  of  Sanskrit  to  other  Indian  Languages,  Cultural  Heritage  of  India,  National  Integration  of 
India. 
1.3 Three language formula – meaning and scope, Place of Sanskrit in the   secondary  school  curriculum 
with reference to Three language formula.                    
1.4 Importance of Sanskrit as first language in the secondary school curriculum in the Karnataka  State.   
 
Unit‐2 Lesson Plan in Sanskrit Language                   
2.1   Aims and objectives of Sanskrit teaching – General objectives and Instructional objectives. 
2.2   Planning lesson plans in Prose, Poetry and Grammar. 
2.3   Micro lesson plan – Importance & format. 
2.4   Unit plan and Resource unit – Importance & format  
 

Unit‐ 3 Development of Language Skills                 
3.1 Listening ‐ Meaning & importance; Defects in pupil’s listening skills and their remedies; Factors to be kept  
      in mind while developing listening skill in the classroom teaching.   
3.2 Speaking ‐ Importance of speaking skill in the development of personality of the child; Defects in pupil’s  
      speaking skills and their remedies; activities to develop Speaking skill among the pupil’s in classroom.  
3.3 Reading ‐ meaning and importance; Preparation for development of reading skill; Types of reading ‐ loud  
      reading & silent reading‐Their meaning & importance. 
3.4 Writing ‐ Importance of legible and beautiful handwriting in the development of pupil’s personality;  
      Characteristics of good handwriting; Methods of teaching in skill of writing; Composition – its importance      
      and types ‐ oral composition & written composition. 
 

Unit 4 Curriculum Design      
4.1  Sanskrit text book ‐ Features and importance. 
4.2  Principles of text book construction of Sanskrit. 
4.3  Characteristics of good Sanskrit text book. 
4.4  Critical analysis of present VIII and IX text books of Sanskrit.       
          

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials: 
Unit 1:
• Arrange a seminar on the topic “Sanskrit is not a dead language.” 

54 
 
Unit 2:  
• Prepare a report analysing difference  between objectives of prose and objectives of poetry on the 
topics of your choice. 
Unit 3: 
• List the language activities to develop speaking skills among the pupils in Sanskrit teaching either in 
the 8th standard or 9th std textbook. 
Unit 4: 
• Analyse Sanskrit grammar from VIII and IX First language Sanskrit text books. 
 
Assignments: (Any one)   
• Work book in Sanskrit. 
• Collection of Sanskrit Quotations with explanation. 

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 

55 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­5:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
URDU

Objectives: Upon the completion of the course the student – teacher will be able to: 48 Hours
1. Know the importance of teaching the mother tongue (Urdu).
2. Acquire the Basic skills of language learning and Teaching
3. Uses, defects, methods of teaching learning literature.
4. Select the methods diaries and techniques of Urdu teaching.
5. Use varieties of learning Experiences and instructional materials while teaching Urdu.
6. Help the trainees acquire working knowledge of grammatical terminology and grammatical
system in Urdu.
7. Analyse curriculum, syllabus, textbook and contents of the subjects Urdu.
8. Integrate content methods lesson plans.

Unit 1 : Concept and Nature of the Urdu Language


1.1. Language : its meaning, origin, development and uses
1.2. Special features of Urdu language.
1.3. Urdu as a first language, medium of instruction and link language
1.4. Importance of Urdu language in school curriculum.
Unit 2 : Aims and Objectives of Teaching Urdu
2.1 Aims and general objectives of teaching Urdu at secondary level
2.2 Instructional objectives of teaching Urdu with their specification.
2.3 Developing of language skill: listening, speaking, reading, writing.
2.4 Role of Urdu as a cultural, functional and literary.
Unit 3 : Preparation of lesson plan in Urdu language
3.1 Micro teaching : concept, construction, administration
3.2 Preparation of model lesson plan for prose and poetry, grammar and composition
3.3 Unit plan : meaning, steps, uses
3.4 Recourse unit : meaning, steps, uses
Unit 4 : Organising Co - Curricular Activities in Teaching Urdu Language
4.1 Liked in teaching: need: importance: audio visual and audio visual aids
4.2 Different occasion for their uses, preparing, improving and selecting
4.3 Teaching aid for effective Urdu language laboratory
4.4 Different co curricular activities which promotes learning languages
4.5 Use of computer in Urdu language teaching

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit 1
• Exercise to enrich vocabulary among secondary students
• Innovative lesson plan for the teaching of prose, poetry, grammar and composition
• Classroom organization, beginning and ending lessons, asking questions, giving instructions, building
report.
• Plug points for CCE

Unit 2
• Biography of Urdu poets and authors
• Studying the problems of student teacher thru interview or brief survey
• Usining Rhymes and songs from web sites, listening to cassettes and CDs
• Reading and discussing, NCF -2005,

56 
 
Unit 3
• Critical analysis of any one of the biography on poet
• Any other relevant activity based on the content
• Using Web resources – teaching Ideas, Lesson plans, etc.
• Materials preparation-using and supplementing textbooks, teacher made task/worksheets, learning
cards, big books

Unit 4
• A study of errors in spelling pronunciation and speaking, reading, writing suggesting remedial
measures
• PPT in teaching structures in vocabulary Urdu language
• Video watching –using You Tube.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 

57 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­5:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
ENGLISH

Objectives: On Completion of the course the student teacher will be able to; 48 Hours
1. Understand structure and functions of English language.
2. Discuss the position of English in India.
3. Understand different approaches and methods of teaching English and their uses in the class-rooms.
4. Acquire the basic skills of language learning.
5. Understand the relationship between language and literature.
6. Understand the teaching of prose, poetry and drama.
7. Develop and use teaching aids in the class room both print and audio-visual materials.
8. Understand the process of language evaluation.
9. Analyse the syllabus and textual materials.
10. Understand and develop competencies and professional growth of English teacher.
11. Develop activities and project for learners.

Unit 1: Nature of English Language


1.1 Meaning and structures of English language – Phonological, Morphological, Syntactic, Graphic and
Semantic.
1.2 Functions of language – Informative, Expressive and Directive functions.

Unit 2: Position of English in India


2.1 English as a Colonial language, English in post – Colonial times – views of Kothari Commission (64-66)
and National Curriculum Framework (2005)
2.2 Role of English language – English as library language, link language and International language.
2.3 Aims and objectives of teaching English as a First and Second language in India.

Unit 3: An overview of Language Teaching


3.1 Psychological principles of learning English
3.2 A critical Analysis of Different Approaches / Methods of Teaching English : The Structural approach, The
Grammar translation method, The Direct method, The Bilingual method, The Audio lingual method and
The Communicative approach
3.3 Language and Literature:Teaching of different forms of English literature : poetry, prose and
Drama.Understanding literature in the school curriculum.
3.4 Translation : Importance and need. Translation as a creative activity.

Unit 4: Acquisition of Language Skills


4.1 Listening and speaking : Tasks and materials for developing the listening and speaking skills : Storytelling,
dialogues, situational conversations, role plays, speeches, games, language laboratory, pictures, authentic
materials and multimedia resources.
4.2 Reading : Sub skills of reading, Importance of reading. Types of reading: Reading aloud and silent reading ;
Extensive and Intensive reading ; Study skills : use of reference materials – dictionary, encyclopaedia,
source books.
4.3 Writing : Aims and stages of writing ; process of writing. Evaluation of Formal and informal writing such
as poetry, short story, letter, diary, notices, reports, advertisements.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


• Collect ten examples of Grammar in context from English text books of classes VIII and IX
• Visit Threee schools in the neighbourhood and prepare a report on the three Language formula being
implemented in the schools
• Write a brief Life sketch on any author of your choice.

58 
 
• preparation of substitution table
• Descriptive analysis of vowel, consonants sounds.
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 

59 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­6:  Pedagogy of School Subject – II (POSS­II) 
GEOGRAPHY AND ECONOMICS
OBJECTIVES: Upon completion of the course the student-teacher will be able to: 48 Hours

1. Acquire knowledge about basic facts, concepts, laws, principles, and trends in Geography and Economics.
2. Acquire knowledge and understanding of the aims and objectives of Geography and Economics.
3. Realize the values of learning Geography and Economics.
4. Make use of Audio-Visual aids about Geography and Economics.
5. Develop skills in organizing planning learning experiments and in writing and organizing the lesson plan.
6. Know and understand importance of methods of teaching Geography and Economics.
7. Acquire knowledge about the content of text-book of Geography and Economics.

UNIT-1. Conceptual Framework of Geography and Economics.


1.1. Meaning, Definitions, Nature, Scope and Importance of Geography.
1.2. Physical and Economical Geography and their importance.
1.3. Meaning, Definitions, Nature, Scope and importance of Economics.
1.4. Study of Geography and Economics for National Integration and International Understanding.

UNIT-2 Goals and Instructional materials in teaching of Geography and Economics.


2.1. Aims /Values of teaching Geography and Economics.
2.1.1. Intellectual aims.
2.1.2. Cultural aims.
2.1.3. Environmental aims.
2.1.4. Utilitarian aims.
2.1.5. Aesthetic aims.
2.2. Taxonomy and Objectives of teaching Geography and Economics.
2.2.1. Knowledge.
2.2.2. Understanding
2.2.3. Application.
2.2.4. Skills.
2.2.5. Attitude and Interest.
2.3 Need and characteristics of text-book in teaching of Geography and Economics.
2.4 Audio-visuals Aids-software – charts, maps, globe, pictures and models.

UNIT-3. Lesson Planning in Geography and Economics


3.1. Meaning, Definitions, Importance and format of lesson plan.
3.2. Steps involves in Lesson Planning and Characteristics of Lesson Plan.
3.3. Unit Plan- Meaning, Definitions, Importance, Format, Characteristics and difference between Unit Plan
and Lesson Plan .
3.4. Resources Unit – Meaning , Importance, and format.

UNIT-4. Approaches and Methods of Teaching Geography and Economics


4.1. Meaning and importance of methods of teaching Geography andEconomics.
4.2. Different methods of teaching Geography and Economics.
4.3 Teacher centered Methods.
4.3.1. Lecture Method Meaning , Steps , Merits and
4.3.2. Laboratory Method Demerits.
4.4. Child centered Methods
4.4.1. Observation Method Meaning , Steps , Merits and
4.4.2. Excursion Method Demerits.
4.4.3. Project Method
4.4.4. Discussion Method

60 
 
Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:

Unit 1
• To study the physical conditions around the Locality.
• To study the physical conditions around the school.
• Reading of geography discoverers.
• The role of geography and economics in developing national integration.

Unit 2
• Identification of Geographical values from any one of the unit of Geographic Economics.
• Preparation of maps, charts and models.
• Writing of instructional objectives in behavioural terms.

Unit 3
• Constructional unit plan.
• Construction of resource plan.
• To study the difference between lesson plan and unit plan.

Unit 4
• Collections of specimens.
• Preparation of a project report based on local geographical survey.
• Visit to industry.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

61 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­6:  Pedagogy of School Subject – II (POSS­II) 
History and Civics
Objectives: Upon completion of the course the student teacher will be able to: 48 Hours
1. Understand meaning, scope and importance of History and Political Science in the school curriculum.
2. Acquire content knowledge of methods of History and Political Science.
3. Acquire knowledge of aims and instructional objectives of teaching History and Political Science.
4. Acquire skills in planning lesson in History and Political Science.
5. Acquire knowledge about local, regional, national and world History.
6. Acquire the knowledge of instructional material and resources in teaching History and Political
Science.
7. Cultivate the qualities of a good History and Political Science teacher.
8. Acquire the knowledge of content of History and civics for VIII to Xth standard in Karnataka.
9. Evaluate History and Political Science text books and prescribed courses.

Unit-I Nature and Scope of History, Sociology and Political Science


1.1 Meaning, Nature, scope and importance of History.
1.2 Modern concept of History, History is an art or science, Different levels of History – local, regional,
national and world History.
1.3 Meaning, scope & importance of Political Science.
1.4 Meaning , scope & importance of Sociology
    
Unit-II Aims and Objectives of Teaching History, Sociology and Political Science
2.1. Aims and objectives of teaching History,
2.2 Aims of teaching Political Science
2.2.1 Political consciousness, understanding of current events, democratic citizenship,
understanding structure and functions of union and state government.
2.2.2 Functional awareness of rights and duties of citizens.
2.3 Aims of teaching sociology Social life, social awareness and socialization.
2.4 Instructional objectives of teaching History and Political Science and Sociology-
Knowledge, understanding, critical thinking skills, attitude, interest, application, appreciation;
analysis of these objectives of specific behaviors of learners.

Unit – III Planning of Lessons in History, Sociology and Political Science


3.1 Meaning, characteristics and importance of lesson plan
3.2 Format of lesson plan – its stages, selection of relevant content, selection of appropriate devices and
assignments. (Spelling out instructional objectives and learning outcome)
3.3 Unit Plan – Meaning, Steps and Importance
3.4 Resource Unit – Meaning, Steps and Importance

Unit-IV Methods and Techniques of Teaching History, Sociology and Political Science  
4.1 Meaning and importance of methods
4.2 Methods of teaching History – Dramatization, Discussion, Source, Project, Biographical.
4.3 Methods of teaching Political Science – Survey, Observation, Demonstration method
4.4 Methods of teaching sociology – field trips, visits, excursion.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:

Unit 1
• Debate on History is an Art or Science? And prepare a report on it.
• Visit local Historical places and prepare a report.
• Visit to rural and urban social backward community and prepare a report on it.

62 
 
Unit 2
• Organize the Mock Parliament and prepare a report.
• Organize College Election and report on it.
• Writing instructional objectives on different topics of History/Political Science/Sociology.

Unit 3
• Prepare a lesson plan on topic of History/Political Science/Sociology.
• Prepare a Unit plan on any one topic of History/Political Science/Sociology.
• Prepare a resource unit on any one topic of History/Political Science/Sociology.

Unit 4
• Prepare a lesson plan on Dramatization on any one of the History topic.
• Visit a Gram Panchayat and report activities on it.
• Visit Migrated peoples/ religious institution and report on it,

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

63 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­6:  Pedagogy of School Subject – II (POSS­II) 
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE

Objectives: On Completion of the course the student teacher will be able to; 48 Hours
1. Understand the nature, scope & importance of Biological Science and get acquainted with ancient as
well as modern developments in the field of Bio-sciences.
2. Understand the aims & objectives of teaching Bio-science & will be able to state the objectives in
behavioral terms..
3. Acquaint with the Resources for teaching Biology & their effective utilization.
4. Get exposed to Micro teaching & preparing Resource Unit, Unit Plan & Lesson plans.
5. Understand the concept of curriculum, principles of curriculum construction & trends incurriculum
revision.
6. Be introduced to various methods, approaches & models of teaching Biological science & implement
them in their teaching practice.
7. Understand & prepare the different types of test items for the evaluation of student’s performance in
Biology.
8. Appreciate & inculcate the competencies & commitments needed for a biological science teacher.
9. Plan & execute various curricular & co-curricular activities related to teaching of Bio- Science.

Unit 1: Introduction to Biological Science


1.1 Biological Science: Meaning & Importance
1.2 Nature and Scope of Biological Science
1.3 Relationship between Biology & Human welfare
1.4 Latest Development in the Field Of Biology – Genetic Engineering, Agriculture, Biotechnology,
Microbiology, Food Technology, Environmental Biology, Medicine

Unit 2: Aims and Objectives of Teaching Biological Science


2.1 Aims- Utilitarian Aim; Disciplinarian Aim
2.2 cientific Attitude (Meaning Characteristics and how to develop); Training in Scientific Method; Meaning,
Steps, Significance
2.3 Instructional Objectives - As per NCERT Curriculum Framework – 2005and NCF2005
2.4 Behavioral Specifications of Instructional Objectives with respect to- Knowledge, Understanding,
Application, Skill.

Unit 3: Approaches, Methods, Models & Techniques of Teaching Biology.


3.1 Approaches; Structural and Functional Approach; Type Specimen, Integrated , Constructivist and Spiral
Approach
3.2 Methods Of Teaching- Laboratory Method, Lecture-Cum-Demonstration Method and Guided Discovery
Method
3.3 Models of Teaching- Biological Science Enquiry Model (Joseph Schwab); Memory Model (J. Lucas)
3.4 Self Instructional Technique-Programmed Instruction, Computer Assisted Instruction

Unit 4 Preparation for Teaching


4.1 Text book –Meaning Importance and Characteristics; Pedagogical Analysis of 8th or 9th Standards Biology
Text books of Karnataka State.
4.2 Lesson Planning and Unit Planning – Meaning, Importance and Steps
4.3 Resource Unit – Meaning, Importance and Components
4.4 Concept mapping – Meaning, merits, demerits and example

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


UNIT 1
• Collect the latest contribution / information in the field of biology

64 
 
• Discuss the issues and their implication in different areas in biological service a) Agriculture b) Health
and Medical Science C) Biotechnology Finding Scientific reasons behind traditional beliefs
• Conducting practical class which involves, observation; identification; classification; hypothecation
and experimentation Observation and aesthetic value in biology
• Seminar on developing scientific attitude among high school children

Unit-2
• Suggest any five activities for developing scientific attitude among secondary school students.
• Writing instructional objectives for selected units at secondary school level.
• Write instructional objectives and behavioral specification for selected unit at secondary school

Unit-3
• Studying structure and function of some plants, animals that are prescribed in secondary school text
book.
• Comparision between conceptual approach and investigatory approach Discussion with respect to
teaching a particular concept in both inductive and deductive approach. Analysis of certain projects that
are already conducted in previous years. Preparation of programmed instruction (linear programming).
Discussion with respect to Chaitanya – 2 programme in high schools.
• Power point presentations Studying structure and function of some plants animals that are prescribed in
the high school text book Conducting some Botany and Zoology (Microbiology) practicals and writing
practical records.
• Seminars on meaning, nature and importance of chitanya programme at secondary school level

Unit-4
• Analysis of 8th and 9th Biology Text with special reference to components of scientific knowledge and
learning activities.
• Write a concept map on any topic of your choice
• Analysis of content of 8th and 9th standard biology with special reference to components of scientific
knowledge and learning activities
-Analysis of NCF 2005 science curriculum
-Discussion on historical perspective of Biology curriculum with special reference to BSCS (Biological
Science curriculum survey)
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
65 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course­6:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
MATHEMATICS
OBJECTIVES: Upon completion of this course student teachers will be able to: 48 Hours
 

1. Develop insight in to the meaning , nature , scope and importance of Mathematics Education
2. Appreciate Mathematics to strengthen the student‘s resource.
3. Appreciate the importance of Mathematics Club and Mathematics Laboratory.
4. Construct, Appropriate assessment, Tools for evaluating Mathematics Learning.
5. Stimulate curiosity, Creativity and Inventiveness in Mathematics.
6. Explain the teaching methods , technique , devices for effective teaching - learning Process and
better instruction.
7. Explain the concept and Use of evaluation process , diagnostic and remedial
a. Measures in Mathematics.
8. Develops attitudes to be a committed and competent Mathematics Teacher.

UNIT- 1 Introduction to Mathematics


1.1. Meaning , Nature , Scope , Need and Importance of Mathematics.
1.2. Language and Symbolism of Mathematics
1.3 Relationship of Mathematics with other school subjects and branches of mathematics.
1.4 Contributions of famous Mathematicians
1.4.1. Bhaskaracharya 1.4.2 Shrinivas Ramanujan 1.4.3 Pythagoras
1.4.4 Brahmagupta 1.4.5 Aryabhata 1.4.6 Euclid

   UNIT- 2 Aims and objectives of Mathematics Education


         2.1 Aims and Values of Teaching Mathematics
2.1.1. Utilitarian Value 2.1.2 Disciplinary Value
2.1.3 Cultural Value 2.1.4 Recreational Value
2.2 Objectives of Teaching Mathematics.
2.3 Writing instructional objectives in behavioral terms by following NCERT version
2.4 Revised taxonomy of educational objectives (LORIN ANDERSON)
2.4.1 Remembering 2.4.2 Understanding
2.4.3 Analyzing 2.4.4 Syntheses
2.4.5 Evaluation 2.4.6 Creation

UNIT -3 Planning for Teaching Mathematics


3.1 Lesson Planning : Meaning , Characteristics , Importance and Lesson format
3.2 Unit Plan : Meaning , steps , Advantages and format
3.3 Resource Unit : Meaning , Steps , Importance and Format
3.4 Year Planning : Meaning , Advantages and Format.

UNIT - 4 Approaches and Methods of Teaching Mathematics


4.1 Methods : Meaning, Steps, Examples, Merits, Demerits and Role of teacher of the following.
4.1.1 Inductive and Deductive method 4.1.2 Project Method
4.1.3 Analytic and Synthetic method 4.1.4 Problem Solving method
4.2 Techniques of teaching Mathematics : Meaning and Importance of the following
4.2.1 Supervised Study 4.2.2 self study
4.2.3 Home Work 4.2.4 Drill and Review
4.3 Constructivist approaches : Meaning, Steps and Importance
4.4 Concepts : Meaning of Concepts, Concept formation, Concept mapping

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit 1 :     
• Mathematics  in  day  today  life. 

66 
 
•   Collections of biographies  and contributions of  at least  two           mathematicians   
 
Unit‐2 ;    
• Identifying the mathematics values in school text  book. 
• Writing instructional objectives on any two topics. 
 
Unit‐3      
• Preparation of Resource unit 
• Preparation of year plan 
 
Unit‐4     
• Writing lesson plan by using Indacto‐deducto method    
• Conducting and reporting brain storming activities          
 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks 
External Evaluation                       80 Marks 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

67 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course EPC1: Reading and Reflecting on Text     48 Hours  
This course will serve as a foundation to enable B.Ed students to read and respond to a variety 
of texts in different ways and also learn to think together, depending on the text and the 
purpose of reading.   
Objectives:After completion of the course, student­teachers will be able to:­ 
1. Students will also develop metacognitive awareness to become conscious of their own thinking 
processes and they grapple with diverse texts. 
2. This course will enable student teacher to enhance their capacities as readers and writers by 
becoming participants in the process of reading. 
3. To engage students with the readings interactively – individually and in small groups. 
4. To provide opportunities to write with a sense of purpose and audience, through tasks such as, 
responding to a text with one’s own opinions or writing within the context of other’s ideas. 
5. Course Content:  
 
Activities I: ­ Reading of Texts 
1. Teacher Educator will give a topic (related to empirical, conceptual and historical work, policy 
documents) for reading, after intensive reading in group or individual pupil teacher will discuss 
their view on the given topic of reading.  
2. Teacher educator will examine/observe the grappling with diverse texts of the student and 
remedial suggestions will be given. 
 
Activities II: ­ Skill and Strategies  
1. Teacher Educator will demonstrate essential skill (model reading, drill, pronunciation, silent 
reading etc.) of reading & written work.  
2. Narrative texts, expository texts from diverse sources, autobiographical narratives, field notes, 
and ethno graphics could also include addressing different types of reading skills and strategies. 
3. Teacher Educator will set goals for learning, monitoring, comprehension and self‐reflection. 
 
Activities III: ­ Reading assignment 
1. Student could read empirical, conceptual and historical work, policy documents, and studies 
about schools, teaching, learning and about different people’s experiences for discussion or 
creative writing. 
2. Submit reading reflection after completing reading assignment and before coming to class. In 
each reflection students should summarize the important concept of the reading and describe 
what was interesting, surprising or confusing to them. 
 
Activities IV: ­ Observation & Discussion 
1. Pupil teachers will observe the activities of peer group also. 
2. Teacher educator will motivate pupil teachers to thinking about and regulating one’s own 
thinking in the learning process. 
3. Critically analyse activities of own and group during reading, discussion and writing. 
 
Activities V: ­ Evaluation & Reflection 
1. Reflective journal will be developed by pupil teacher for trapping experience, observation and 
views of participant (with the help of teacher educators) 
2. Teacher Educator will critically analyse entire activities on the basis of reflective journal. 
 
Note: ‐ Pupil Teacher will draft a report on entire activities. 
 
Reference: 
1. Reflecting on Literacy in Education. Peter Hannon. Routledge Publication 
2. Reflective Practice: Writing and Professional Development . Gillie Bolton. Sage Publication 

68 
 
3. Write to be Read Teacher's Manual: Reading, Reflection, and Writing.  William R. Smalzer. 
Cambridge University Press. 
4. Literacy and Learning: Reflections on Writing, Reading, and Society. Deborah Brandt. Wiley 
Publishers 
5. Fostering Reflection and Providing Feedback: Helping Others Learn from .By Jane Westberg PhD, 
Hilliard Jason MD, EdD. Springer Publication 
6. Research and Reflection: Teachers Take Action for Literacy Development. Andrea Izzo. 
Information age Publication. 
7. Reading to Learn in the Content Areas.Judy Richardson, Raymond Morgan, Charlene Fleener. 
Cinage Learning 
 

69 
 
              KARNATAK UNIVERSITY, DHARWAD                       No: XXXXXX 
KARNATAKA, INDIA – 580 003 
STATEMENT OF MARKS EXAMINATION OF MAY – 2016 
    BACHELOR OF EDUCATION ‐ I SEMESTE   (CBCS)    MODEL 
NAME :                                                                                                                                                                                                                           SEAT NO : XXXXXXXX
FATHER NAME :                                                                                                                                                                                       MOTHER NAME :
NAME OF THE COLLEGE : 
SUBJEC CODES  SUBJECT NAME THEORY/PRACTICAL IA  TOTAL CREDIT  SEM  CREDIT  GRADE 
1  2  MAX MIN OBT MAX  OBT  MAX MIN OBT HRS  GRADE  POINTS  14 
3  4  5  6  7  8  9  10  11  POINTS  13   
12   
     
SI COURSE  1  CHILDHOOD AND GROWING UP  80  32  20  100  40  4       
SI COURSE  2  LANGUAGE ACROSS THE CURRICULUM  80  32  20  100  40  4   
SI COURSE  3  UNDERSTANDING DISCIPLINE  80  32  20  100  40  4   
SI COURSE  4  SKILLS AND STRATEGIES OF TEACHING  80  32  20  100  40  4   
SI COURSE  5  PADAGOGY OF SCHOOL SUBJECT‐I  (POSS‐I)  80  32  20  100  40  4   
SI COURSE  6  PADAGOGY OF SCHOOL SUBJECT‐II  (POSS‐II)  80  32  20  100  40  4   
SI PRATICUM‐I  READING  AND REFLECTING ON TEXT  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  A/B/C/D/E 
SI PRATICUM‐II  PRACTICUM ON POSS‐I  ‐‐  ‐‐  50  50  ‐‐  2   
SI EPC‐I  PRACTICUM ON POSS‐II  ‐‐  ‐‐  50  50  ‐‐  2 
SI CCC‐I  CONTENT COMPONENT COURSE SUBJECT‐I  50  20  ‐‐  50  20  2 
SI CCC‐II  CONTENT COMPONENT COURSE SUBJECT –II  50  20  ‐‐  50  20  2 
      
Total                                                                                                                                                                                        700     240                      28                 

In Words  
Semester GPA :                                                                     Result                                               Grade     

Note: Column No.12= (Column 10)/10,               Column 11= Total credit hours for each subject.    Column No.13= (Column 12)* (Column 11) 
G.P.A= Total value of Column 13/ Total value of column 11 
E.P.C=Enhancing Professional Capacity.  

PLACE : 
DATE : 
REGISTRAR (EVALUATION 

70 
 
 
 
 
 
Semester 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

71 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester 2 
Course­7: Learning and Teaching  
Objectives: After completion of the course, student­teachers will be able to:­     48 Hours 
1. To develop scientific attitude for the process of teaching & learning. 
2. To  develop  understanding  about  the  relationship  of  cognitive,  social  and  emotional  development 
with learning process. 
3. To provide an overall view on teaching & learning style and ideas to enhance these activities. 
4. To  introduce  student  –  teachers  with  teaching  skill,  component  and  parameters  of  effective 
teaching. 
5. To develop insight for perfect teaching by with its overall perspectives in detail. 
 
Unit ­1 Psychological domains of Teaching & Learning 
1. Cognation  and  Cultural  cognitive  Psychology:  ‐  Meaning,  concept,  Important,  domains  and  its 
relationship with Learning & Teaching. 
2. Social  development –  Meaning,  Importance, Social  process  and  its  effect  on  Teaching  &  Learning, 
theory of social construction(Bruner) 
3. Emotional development: ‐ Meaning, Process, Need to Study and its effect on Teaching and Learning 
 
Process.  
 

Unit ­2 Effective Teaching: 
1. Effective  Teaching  :  Meaning,  Component  and  Parameters  of  Effective  Teaching,  Identification  of 
Teaching  Skills,  Principles  of  Teachng,  Classroom  instruction  strategies,  Teacher  as  a  Learner, 
Responsibilities of Teacher. 
2. Teaching  for  culturally  diverse  students,  theory  of  culturally  relevant  pedagogy  (Landson  Billing 
1995 and Plato, 2009). 
3. Values & personal relationship between Teachers and Learners relationship among learners, self–
 
esteem and freedom experienced by learner. 
 

Unit ­3 Learning: 
1. Learning  –  Meaning,  and  characteristics,  learning  factors,  influencing  factors,  Kind  of  learning, 
Tradition and changes in view of the learning process a shift from teaching to learning. 
2. Principles of learning, Quality of learning. 
3. Discovering learning‐Meaning, concept, Principle to assess quality of learning.  
4. A learning Cycle for discovery, classroom Instruction Strategies Theories supporting the new view 
of the learning process. 
5. Learning  as  construction  of  knowledge  (NCERT,  2005)  Learning  in  and  outside  school  and  its 
relationship with learners’ motivation learning in diverse socio‐cultural condition. 
 

Unit ­4 learning style: 
1. Diversity  among  learners  and  learning  needs  (with  reference  to  special  needs)  multilingual 
background  concept  and  Philosophy  of  inclusive  education.  Learning  Style:  ‐  concept,  Types  and 
importance  in  Teaching  –Learning  process,  factor  effecting  on  learning  style,  concept  of  thinking 
 
style and its relationship with learning style. 
Unit V Teaching style 
1. Teaching  Style:  ‐  Concept,  Types  and  effect  on  learners’  learning  process,  factor  effecting  on 
Teaching Style. 
2. Effective Teacher behavior, Role of Hemisphere city in Thinking learning and Teaching Style. 
 
3. Teaching as profession, effective classroom management.  
Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:
 
Unit – I : Practicum/Field Work 
• Critical analysis of School situation in terms of its role in promoting learners cognitive and non‐
cognitive learning outcome and report on entire activities. 

72 
 
 
• Preparation of learners profile based on congnitive and non cognitive characteristics to depict inter 
and intra individual differences. 
 
Unit – II : Practicum/Field Work 
• A  Survey  based  report  on  an  effective  Teacher  behaviours  or  class  room  Instruction 
Strategies of effective Teacher. 
• Analysis of record or Teaching and Learning by Video recording of your own lesson. 
• Analysis of classroom teaching episode in the light of teaching skill/strategies. 
 
Unit – III : Practicum/Field Work 
• Study of a case and prepare a report on influential factors of learning. 
• On the basis of regular visit (one week) to same class and student, analysis of influential 
factors of learning. 
• Present the report in class workshop. 
 
Unit – IV : Practicum/Field Work 
• Identify learning style of at least 5‐student at primary to secondary level. (Any one) 
• Through active involvement with students(playing, storytelling, puzzlegames, readingetc.) 
observe differential learning needs of the learners with regard to learning styles and draft 
a report for presentation. 
 
Unit – V : Practicum/Field Work 
• Draft  a  report  on  Teachers’  Teaching  Style  by  one  week  Classroom  observation  of  two 
teachers (One may be Rural and One may be Urban)  
• Make your own lesson Plan by studying Teacher’s diaries. 
• Analysis of classroom teaching episode in the light of classroom management. 
• Create  facilitative  learning  environments  through  enhancing  motivation, 
positiveemotions, collaborative and self‐regulated learning, examine the effect on learning 
level.( Through pre and posttest of learners treatment should at least of one week) 
• Present the report of entire programme in class. 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
73 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester 2 
Course 8: Knowledge and Curriculum­I  
Objectives: After completion of the course, student­teachers will be able to:  48 Hours 
1. To understand the way in which the curriculum is driven by assessment. 
2. To critically analyse various samples of textbook 
3. To identify various dimensions of the curriculum and their relationship with the aims of 
Education. 
4. To examine the epistemological basis of education. 
5. To discuss the basics of modern child centered education. 
6. To identify relationship between the curriculum framework and syllabus.  
7.  To understand the relationship between power, ideology and the curriculum.  
8. To  help prospective teachers to take decisions about and shape educational and pedagogic 
practice with greater awareness of the theoretical and conceptual under pinnings that inform 
it, 
9.  To discuss the basis of modern child‐centered education   
10. To understand education in relation to modern values like equity and equality, individual 
opportunity and social justice and dignity.   
Unit –I Knowledge Generation 
1. Concept  &  Meaning  of  Education,  Distinction  between  knowledge  and  skill  Teaching  and 
Training, Knowledge and information, reason and belief. Chronological review on Knowledge 
generation,  myth  based  faith  and  logical  based  knowledge,  various  structures  of  society  and 
knowledge and their linkage and relationship.  
 
Unit –II   Child­ centered education 
1. Modern Child‐Centered Education,: meaning, concept and its basis.  
2. Educational  Thoughts  on  child  centered  Education  of  Gandhi  &  Tagore,  Dewey  (2004)  and 
Plato, Buber and Freire. 
Unit – III Society, culture and Modernity 
1. Society,  Culture  and  Modernity:  ‐  Meaning,  Concept  and,  relationship,  amongst  Historical 
Changes  introduced  by  Industrialization,  democracy  and  ideas  of  individual  autonomy  
Education in relation to modern values, equity, equality, individual opportunity and social 
justice and dignity with special reference to amSSkar.( Rodrigues, 2002) 
 
Unit –IV National issues 
1. Meaning & Concept of nationalism, universalism and secularism and their interrelationship 
with Education (With Special reference to Tagore (2003) and Krishnamurti (1992) 
 
Unit­V : Text book and curriculum 
1. Idea  of  Meritocracy:  ‐  The  relationship  between  power,  ideology  and  curriculum  (Apple, 
2008) Power, ideology and curriculum: Meaning, concept and importance. 
2. Text book – Criteria of selection, and critical analysis of Text Book, Children’s literature and 
teacher’s  handbooks  Method  of  Assessment.Understanding  the  relationship  between 
curriculum, syllabus and textbook; Selection  of  materials;   Development  of  activities  and  
tasks;  Connecting learning  to  the  world  outside;  Moving  away  from  rote‐learning  to 
constructivism;  Teacher  as  a  researcher.  (Develop meaningful strategies keeping in  view  
the  needs  of  the  learners.) 
 
 
Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:
Unit – 1 : Practicum/Field Work 
• Conduct a play on journcy of knowledge on any one issue/innovation/Discovery such as aeroplane 
or bio computer. 
• Decide dialogues and characters according to the script of the play. 
74 
 
• Make use of full presence of students and staff for impressive performance. 
• Analysis of social myths in the light of scientific values and culture. , life skills etc. 
 
Unit – 2 :Practicum/Field Work 
• Organize a /stage play a drama on educational thought of Mahatma Gandhi/RavindraNath Tagore. 
• Organize  child  entered  activity  for  enhancement  of  children  education  and  values  based  on 
Gandhian/ Ravndra thoughts. 
• Perform  a  drama  on  social,  academic  and  life  history  of  eminent  educationist  like  RavindraNath 
Tagore. 
 
Unit – 3 : Practicum/Field Work 
• Make  a  presentation,  feedback  collect  Folk  songs,  Folk  culture  and  Customs.to  find  out  modern 
values. 
• Organize a debate on Social equality. 
• Organize a poster designing competition for awareness of girl’s education and Female infanticide. 
• Student  should  contact  the  people  of  nearby  area  of  school  for  social  issues.  For  collecting 
information related to Folk songs, Folk culture and Customs, student should contact rural people. 
• To understand how to sing folk songs, the student should be present in the folk song events. 
 
Unit – 4 : Practicum/Field Work 
• Practice of Poems/Songs/Parodies on nationalism, universalism and regionalism. 
• Formation and administration of attitude scale on Nationalism, Universalization and secularism 
and prepare a report. 
• Organize a quiz contest on Nationalism, Universalization and secularism and prepare a report. 
• Prepare a questionnaire subject wise. 
• Communicate rules about quiz competition in group. 
• Ensure participation of all the members of school in programs.  
 
Unit – 5 : Practicum/Field Work 
• Organize a seminar on relationship among power, ideology and Curriculum. 
• Critical review or analysis of the text book at upper primary and senior secondary level. 
 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks
 
Reference 
 
1. Schilvest, W.H. (2012), Curriculum: prospective paradigm and possiilty.M.C  MLLAN   publication. 
2. Hirst, Paul, H. Knowledge and the curriculum. Routledge publication. 
3. Letha rammohan (2009). Curriculum instrchon and evaluation. Agerwal publication, Agra. 
4. Scolt, dand (2003). Curriculum studies: curriculum knowledge. Routledgefalmes, m.y. 
5. Kelly, AV. (2009). The curriculum: theory and practice sage publication Singapore. 
6. Shulman  L.  S.  (1986)  those  who  understand:  knowledge  growth  in  teaching.  educational 
researcher, 4‐14 
7. Sinha, S. (2000) Acquiring literacy in schools, seminar, 38‐42 
8. Sternberg,  R.J.  (2013).  intelligence,  competence,  and  expertise,  in  A.J.  Elliot  &  C.S.  Dweck  (Eds), 
handbook of competence and motivation (pp 
9. Tagore,  R.  (2003)  Civilization  and  progress.  in  crisis  in  civilization  and  other  essays.  newdelhi: 
rupa&co. 
10. Pathak, A (2013) Social implications of schooling: knowledge pedagogy and consciousness. Aakar 
books 
75 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester 2 
Course­ 9: Assessment for Learning 
Objectives: After completion of the course, student­teachers will be able to:­      48 Hours 
1. To understand assessing children’s progress, both in terms of their psychological development and 
the criteria provided by the curriculum. 
2. To provide broad outlook to go beyond the limited context of syllabus‐based achievement testing, 
achievement scores in a subject linked with the child’s overall development. 
3. To introduce student teachers to the history of evaluation and current practices. 
4. Understand  the  different  dimensions  of  learning  and  related  assessment  procedures,  tools  and 
techniques. Analyse, Manage and interpret assessment data. 
5. Understanding  the  policy  perspectives  on  examination  and  evaluation  and  their  implementation 
practices. Assessment for culturally responsive in diverse classroom. 
6. Develop  critical  understanding  of  issues  in  assessment  and  explore,  realistic,  comprehensive  and 
dynamic assessment process which are culturally responsive for use in the classroom. 
7.  Develop  enabling  processes  which  lead  to  better  learning  and  more  confident  and  creative 
learners. 
8. Understand the critical role of assessment in enhancing learning 
9. Critiques  the  traditional  purpose  of  assessment  (as  a  mechanism  to  filter  learners  as  per  their 
abilities or potentials and thus reducing learning to a limited set of expertise that can be displayed 
on  papers,  assessment  as  a  selective  and  competitive  act  and  achievement  as  an  outcome  of 
individual’s innate factors.) 
Unit 1 Concept of Assessment 
1. Meaning  &  concept  of  assessment,  Measurement,  and  Evaluation  and  Their  Interrelationship, 
Purpose  of  Assessment  (Prognostic,  Monitoring  of  Learning,  Providing  Feedback,  Promotion, 
Diagnosing. Principles of Assessment, and Perspectives.) 
Unit­2: Type of assessment 
1. Classification of assessment: Base on purpose (Prognostic, Formative, Diagnostic and Summative), 
Scope  (Teacher  made,  Standardized)  Attribute  measured  (Achievement,  Aptitude,  Attitude,  etc.), 
Nature  of  information  gathered  (Qualitative,  Quantitative)  Mode  of  response  (Oral  and  written, 
Nature of interpretation (norm referenced, criteria referenced).  
2. Assessment  of  cognitive  learning  :  Types  and  levels  of  Cognitive  learning,  understanding  and 
application, thinking skills – convergent, divergent, critical, problem solving and decision making, 
items and procedures for their assessment . 
Unit­3: Continuous and comprehensive evaluation. 
1. Assessment of affective learning: attitude and values, interest, self – concept items and procedures 
for their assessment. 
2. Grading:  Concept,  types  and  Application,  Indicators  for  grading  Psycho‐Social  and  Political 
dimensions of assessment. 
3. Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation: Concept, Need and Process. 
4. School visits followed by presentation on evaluation practices in schools  
Unit­4: Assessment Devices 
1. Use  of  projects,  Assignments,  Worksheet,  Practical  Work,  and  Performance  based  activities, 
seminars and reports as assessment devices. 
2. Assessment of Group Processes – Cooperative Learning and Social Skills.  
3. Self, Peer and Teacher Assessment. 
4. Commercialization of assessment.  
5. Participatory  assessment  and  community  monitoring  critical  analysis  of  prevalent  practices  of 
assessment. 
6. Typology  of  questions;  Activities  and  tasks  (open‐ended  questions,  MCQ,  true  and  false,  etc.)  
reflecting    ‐    Problem    solving,    creative    and    critical  thinking,    enhancing    imagination    and  
environmental  awareness. 
 

76 
 
7. Feedback to/from students, parents and teachers. 
 
Unit­5: Assessment practices 
1. Construction and Selection of items, Guidelines for Construction of test items, assembling the test 
items, Guideline for administration. 
2. Scoring procedure – Manual and e‐assessment. 
3. Analysis  and interpretation of  student’s  performance  processing  test,  performance,  calculation  of 
percentage, central tendency measurement, graphical representations. 
4. Recording and reporting of forums for engagement with community work. 
5.  Relationship  of  assessment  with  self‐esteem;  motivation  and  identity  as  learner,  assessment  of 
fixed and growth mindsets.     
6. Non‐detention  policy  in  RTE  act  (2009)  and  its  relationship  with  curriculum,  pedagogy  and 
teachers. 
 

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit­1 :Practicum/Field Work 
• Observe the teaching learning process in class room and prepare a report and feedback on it. 
• Prepare a diagnostic test of any subject at upper primary to senior secondary, give suggestions for 
improvement. 
 
Unit­2: Practicum/Field Work 
• Organize a group discussion to assess thinking skills of students.  
• Conduct  a  competition  amongst  students,  giving  them  any  topic  and  asking‐them  to  make  a 
response oral or written. On the basis of response evaluate their personality or skills; ask them to 
take remedial measure,too.Measures. 
• Presentation of papers on examination and evaluation policies. 
 
Unit­3: Practicum/Field Work 
• To organize a drama/short play on value based topic. 
• To assess self‐concept of the students in class room and provide them feedback for it. 
• Conduct a summary to express the feeling of students about parents, teacher and peers. 
 
Unit­4 :Practicum/Field Work 
• Organise  a  group  activity  (like  competition/story  telling/reading/writing)  and  get  it  assessed  by 
self, peer and teacher. 
• Draft a report on variation among assessment. 
• Seminars on contemporary issues of assessment and measurement.  
• School Visits followed by presentation on evaluation practices in schools. 
• Conduct  a  community  work  with  involvement  of  children,  students,  teachers  and  society,  and 
evaluate the work. 
• Prepare an annual plan for continuous and comprehensive evaluation at upper primary to senior 
secondary level any subject. 
 
Unit­5: Practicum/Field Work 
• Debate on merits and demerits of manual and electronic scoring procedure. 
• Construction, administration and interpretation of self‐made achievement text. 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks
 
 
Reference: 
1‐ Paul, Black (2012). Assessment for learning McGraw. 
2‐ East, lorna M. Assessment as learning sage pub. 2010 
3‐ Ecclestone,  Kathryn.  Transforming  formative  assessment  in  life  long  learning.  McGrauH,ll. 
Eng.2010 
77 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester 2 
Course­ 10: Educational Technology
Objectives: Upon completion of the course the student teacher will be able to. 48 Hours
1. Acquire the knowledge of Educational Teaching, its meaning and importance.
2. Understand the taxonomy of educational objectives-classified by Bloom, Krathowhol and Harrow.
3. Explore the creative avenues in technological advancements for improving the teaching learning process.
4. Empower prospective teachers through the blending of technological aspects with pedagogical principles.
5. Learn to use specified media hardware and to produce and select instructional software appropriate to
particular occasions.
6. Familiarise with domain based assessment practices.

Unit 1: Concept of Educational Technology.


1.1 Educational technology – meaning definition and Importance.
1.2 Objectives of Educational Technology
1.3 Nature and scope of Educational Technology.
1.4 Instrumental Resource centre for Educational Technology.
CIET- Central Institue of Educational Technology in NCERT
SIET- State Institute of Educational Technology
EDUSAT- Educational Satellite
Gyan Darshan-

Unit 2: Educational Objectives.


2.1 Concept and differences of Educational Aims and Objectives.
2.2 Taxonomy of Educational objectives. Classification given by Bloom, Krathwohl and Harrow.
2.3 NCERT Version of classification of objectives : Knowledge, understanding, application, skill, attitude
interest and appreciation.
2.4 Mager’s components for writing an instructional objective.

Unit 3 : Innovation in Teaching


3.1 Programmed Instruction – Meaning, Basic principles.
3.2 Styles of programming
Linear – meaning, characteristics, merits and demerits
Branching - meaning, characteristics, merits and demerits.
3.3 Evaluation of a programme: Individual small group and field testing. Error rate, Density of the
programme.
3.4 Computer Assisted Instruction (CAI)

Unit 4: Audio – Visual Equipments.


4.1 Meaning, significance and guiding principles of A.V. Equipments.
4.2 Classification :Hardware and Software- Meaning and Difference
Examples: Charts, Models, Specimens, LCD, Computer, Interactive Board.
(Important of the above in teaching learning process)
4.3 Role of Mass Media in education: Radio, News papers, Television and Films
4.4 Edger Dales Cone of Experience.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials :


Unit -1
1.1. Discuss the Importance of Education technology
1.2. Collection of information regarding educational technology
1.3. Programmes-reports of Edusat, Gyan Darshan
1.4. Functions of CIET- Central Institute of Educational Technology in NCERT
78 
 
SIET- State Institute of Educational Technology

Unit -2
2.1. Differences between Educational aims and objectives
2.2. Writing instructional objectives classification of Bloom Taxonomy
2.3. Krathwohl and Harrow using Mager’s components
2.4. Classification of objective According Cognitive, Affective and
Psych-motors domain
2.5. NCERT version of objectives using specifications.
2.6. Mager’s components for writing an instructional objectives

Unit -3
3.1. Writing ten frames in linear programme
3.2. Writing frames of branching programme
3.3. Finding Error rate of the programme
3.4. Writing lesson plan C I in any one method

Unit -4
4.1. Preparation of PPT in respective methods (any one).
4.2. List the Hardwares for teaching and learning
4.3. Write Role of Radio and Mass Media in education
4.4. Write a Radio lesson on any topic.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

Reference 
• Bloom.B.S. (1956). Taxonomy of Educational Objectives.
• Sharma.R.A. (1991). Technology of Teaching.
• Gulati.R. (1976). Programmed Learning.
• Skinner.B.F. (1968). Technology of Teaching.
• J.C.Aggarwal.(1979). Essentials of Educational Technology, New Delhi:IBH.
• Shahapur N P. (2009). Advanced Educational Technology. Gadag: Vidyanidhi Prakashan.
• Kongawad N B (2009). Shikshandalli Tantrajnyan. Gadag :Vidyanidhi Prakashan.
• Vanaja.M. (2012). Educational Technology.
• Myageri.C.(2012).EducationalTechnology,Gadag:Vidyanidhi Prakashan.
• Yadawad S B & Shet G P (2013) Education Technilogy, Vdyanidhi Prakashan Gadag.
• Kongawad N B Shaikshanik Tantrashastra v Education Gadag Vidyanidhi Prakashana.
• Hampi holi & Kulkarni (1998). Shykshanika Tantragyana.
 
 
 

79 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­11:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
ENGLISH
48 hours
Unit 1: Teaching of English Language
1.1 Teaching of prose – objectives, steps in lesson planning and methods.
1.2 Teaching of poetry – Objective, steps in lesson planning and methods.
1.3 Teaching of grammar – objectives, types: formal and functional, methods of teaching
1.4 Teaching of vocabulary-types of vocabulary selection and gradation, ways of enrichment of vocabulary.

Unit 2: Teaching – Learning Materials and Aids: (Meaning and purposes of use)
2.1 ICT – audio,visual and audio-visual aids : Video, T.V. Films, Language lab, Print media : texts,
magazine, news paper, class library and e-learning in English
2.2 Planning co-curricular activities : discussion, debates. Workshops, seminar to promote Learning of
language. Language club: importance and activities.
2.3 Teacher of English language
2.3.1 The teacher of English language – competencies, role of teacher as an innovator, and researcher.
2.3.2 Need of training, ways of professional growth and English teacher’s Association.
Unit 3: Evaluation in English
3.1 Importance and Types of evaluation
3.2 Techniques of evaluation – oral, written, self-evaluation, peer evaluation, group evaluation.
3.3 Typology of Questions: Reflecting, problem solving, creative and critical thinking questions.
Continuous and comprehensive evaluation.
Unit 4: Analysis of syllabus and Textual materials
4.1 Understanding the relationship among curriculum, syllabus and text books.
4.2 Critical evaluation of VIII and IX standard text books.
4.3 Connecting learning to the world out sides moving away from rote-learning to Constructivism.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


• Prepare a report containing the critical analysis of any one English poem of your Choice.
• Prepare a list of audio visual aids related to teaching of text books prescribed either for Higher Primary &
secondary Schools.
• Prepare a Typology of questions on the topic of your choice.
• Analyse the Annual question paper of English language of X std.
• Preparation of instructional kit

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

Reference 
• V. Saraswati: English language Teaching : Principles and Practice. Orient Longman.
• R. Mathew, L . Eapen and J.Thar . Language Curriculum : Dynamics of Change (Vols 1 and 2). Orient
Longman
• S. Kudchedkar . Readings in English , English language Teaching in India. Orient Longman
• M. L. Tickoo . Teaching and Learning English : A sourcebook for Teachers and Teacher Trainers . Orient
Longman.
• J. Chandler and M. Stone . the Resourceful English Teachr. Viva Books.
• Geeta Nagaraj. English Language Teaching (2010) Orient Blackswan Private Limited, New Delhi.
• Baruah T.C. (1984) The English Teachers Handbook. Sterling Publishers.

80 
 
• Allan C.R. (1971) Teaching English as a second Language. Sterling Publishers.
• Gordon B.S. (1960) The Teaching of English in Free India – Madras; Christian Literature Society.
• Abbott. G and P. Wingard, eds. (1981) The Teaching of English as an International Language. London:
Collins.
• Brumfit, C.J. (1980) Problems and Principles of English Language Teaching. Oxford : Oxford University
Press.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
81 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­11:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I)
GzÉÝñÀUÀ¼ÀÄ : CzsÀåAiÀÄ£ÁAvÀåzÀ°è / PÉÆøÀÄð ªÀÄÄV¸ÀĪÀµÀÖgÀ°è ¥Àæw «zÁåyð ²PÀëPÀ/²PÀëQ F PɼÀPÀAqÀ ªÀvÀð£ÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß vÉÆÃgÀÄvÁÛ£É/¼É
(48 UÀAmÉUÀ¼ÀÄ)
1 ««zsÀ gÀÆ¥ÀzÀ PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¥ÁoÀUÀ¼À AiÉÆÃd£ÉAiÀÄ£ÀÄß vÀAiÀiÁj¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
2 UÀæ»PÉAiÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ C©üªÀåQÛAiÀÄ P˱À®UÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¨É¼É¸ÀĪÀ ZÀlĪÀnPÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß gÀƦ¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¤ªÀð»¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
3 ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀĸÀÛPÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥Àæ±Éß ¥ÀwæPÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¸À«ÄÃPÉë ªÀiÁqÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
4 ªÀÄÄzÀæt ¸ÀA¥À£ÀÆä®UÀ¼À£ÀÄß §¼À¸ÀĪÀ PÀæªÀÄ «ªÀj¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
5 ¨sÁµÁ ZÀlĪÀnPÉUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ºÀAvÁ£ÀĸÁj K¥Àðr¸ÀĪÀ PÀgÀªÀÄ ¤gÀƦ¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
6 ««zsÀ §UÉAiÀÄ ¥Àæ±ÉßUÀ¼À£ÀÄß gÀa¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ, ¤ªÀð»¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ, £ÉÊzÁ¤PÀ GzÉÝñÀPÉÌ §¼À¹PÉƼÀÄîªÀÅzÀÄ.
WÀlPÀ 1 : PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸Á»vÀå ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉUÉ AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÀ¼ÀÄ
1.1 WÀlPÀ AiÉÆÃd£É (UÀzÀå ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀzÀå ¥ÁoÀUÀ½UÉ)
1.2 ¥ÁoÀ AiÉÆÃd£É - ¥ÀoÀå (ªÀ¸ÀÄÛ) «±ÉèµÀuÉ DzsÁgÀ¢AzÀ - ¨sÁµÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¸Á»vÀåUÀ¼À ªÀÄÄSÁåA±ÀUÀ¼À ¥ÀnÖ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ C£ÀÄPÀæªÀĪÁV
eÉÆÃqÀuÉ, ¥Àæw ªÀÄÄSÁåA±ÀPÉÌ ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉÆÃzÉÝñÀUÀ¼À ¤gÀÆ¥ÀuÉ.
1.3 ¥Àæw ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉÆÃzÉÝñÀPÉÌ vÀPÀÌ PÀ°PÉAiÀÄ C£ÀĨsÀªÀ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ZÀlĪÀnPÉUÀ¼À DAiÉÄÌ
1.4 ¸ÀÆPÀÛ £ÀªÀÄÆ£ÉAiÀÄ°è ¥ÁoÀ AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÀ¼À vÀAiÀiÁjPÉ PÀæªÀÄ
C) UÀzÀå ¥ÁoÀ AiÉÆÃd£É, D) ¥ÀzÀå ¥ÁoÀ AiÉÆÃd£É, E) ªÁåPÀgÀt ¥ÁoÀ AiÉÆÃd£É, F) ¥Àæ§AzsÀ, ¥ÀvÀæ¯ÉÃR£À, «¸ÀÛgÀt ªÀÄvÀÄÛ
¸ÀAPÉëÃ¥Àt EªÀÅUÀ¼À ¥ÁoÀ AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÀ¼À gÀZÀ£ÉAiÀÄ PÀæªÀÄ

WÀlPÀ 2 : ¨sÁµÁ P˱À®UÀ¼À ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£É


2.1 ¨sÁµÀ P˱À®UÀ¼À ªÀVÃðPÀgÀt – C¸ÀQæAiÀÄ CxÀªÁ UÀæ»PÁ P˱À®UÀ¼ÀÄ D°¸ÀÄ«PÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ NzÀÄUÁjPÉ, ¸ÀQæAiÀÄ/C©üªÀåQÛ
P˱À®UÀ¼ÀÄ - ªÀiÁvÀÄUÁjPÉ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ §gÉAiÀÄĪÀ P˱À®UÀ¼ÀÄ
2.2 D°¸ÀÄ«PÉ – CxÀð, GvÀÛªÀÄ PÉüÀÄUÀ£À ®PÀëtUÀ¼ÀÄ, D°¸ÀĪÀ (GzÉÝñÀ DzsÁgÀ) §UÉUÀ¼ÀÄ-¸ÁªÀiÁ£Àå, ¸ÁgÀUÀæºÀt ªÀÄvÀÄÛ «ªÀıÁð
D°¸ÀÄ«PÉ – EªÀÅUÀ¼À£ÀÄß ¨É¼É¸À®Ä ZÀlĪÀnPÉUÀ¼ÀÄ
2.3 ªÀiÁvÀÄUÁjPÉ - GvÀÛªÀÄ ªÀiÁvÀÄUÁjPÉAiÀÄ ®PÀëtUÀ¼ÀÄ, ªÀiÁvÀÄUÁjPÉAiÀÄ°è PÁtĪÀ zÉÆõÀUÀ¼ÀÄ, ªÀiÁvÀÄUÁjPÉ C©üªÀÈ¢ÞUÉ
ZÀlĪÀnPÉUÀ¼ÀÄ - ¸ÀéAvÀ ªÁPÀåUÀ¼À°è GvÀÛj¸ÀĪÀÅzÀÄ, ¸ÁgÁA±À ºÉüÀĪÀÅzÀÄ, ¸ÀA¨sÁµÀuÉ £ÀqɸÀĪÀÅzÀÄ, ZÀZÁð ¸ÀàzsÉð, ¨sÁµÀt
PÁAiÀÄPÀæªÀÄ
2.4 NzÀÄUÁjPÉ – GvÀÛªÀÄ NzÀÄUÀ£À ®PÀëtUÀ¼ÀÄ – NzÀĪÀ §UÉUÀ¼ÀÄ (GzÉÝñÀ C£ÀĸÀj¹) ¸ÁgÀUÀæt NzÀÄ, gÀ¸ÀUÀæºÀt NzÀÄ,
«ªÀıÁðvÀäPÀ NzÀÄ, (ªÉÃUÀ C£ÀĸÀj¹) eÁUÀÈvÀ NzÀÄ, ¸ÀºÀd NzÀÄ, ²ÃWÀæ NzÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ Cw ²ÃWÀæ NzÀÄ.
2.5 §gÉAiÀÄĪÀ P˱À® - GvÀÛªÀÄ §gÀªÀtÂUÉAiÀÄ ®PÀëtUÀ¼ÀÄ, §gÀªÀtÂUÉAiÀÄ vÁwéPÀ CA±ÀUÀ¼À ¥ÀjUÀt£É, ªÁåªÀºÁjPÀ §gÀªÀtÂUÉ - ¥ÀvÀæ,
ªÀgÀ¢, Cfð, ¸ÀÈd£À ²Ã® §gÀªÀtÂUÉ - ¸ÀtÚPÀvÉ, PÀªÀ£À, £ÁlPÀ.
WÀlPÀ 3 : ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£Á ¸ÀA¥À£ÀÆä®UÀ¼ÀÄ
3.1 ¨sÁµÁ ¥ÀoÀå ¥ÀĸÀÛPÀUÀ¼ÀÄ - ®PÀëtUÀ¼ÀÄ, gÀZÀ£ÉAiÀÄ vÀvÀéUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¥ÀoÀå¥ÀĸÀÛPÀ «ªÀıÉð
3.2 ªÀÄÄzÀæt ªÀiÁzsÀåªÀÄ - ¤WÀAlÄ, «±ÀéPÉÆñÀ, ¤AiÀÄvÀ PÁ°PÉUÀ¼ÀÄ, ¥ÀwæPÉUÀ¼ÀÄ, DPÀgÀ UÀAxÀUÀ¼ÀÄ
3.3 zÀȱÀå ªÀiÁzsÀåªÀÄ - avÀæUÀ¼ÀÄ, zÀÆgÀzÀ±Àð£ÀzÀ ««zsÀ ªÁ»¤AiÀÄ ¸ÁA¸ÀÌøwPÀ, ¸Á»vÀå ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ¨sÁµÁ PÁAiÀÄðPÀæªÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ, PÀA¥ÀÆålgï
¹.r. UÀ¼ÀÄ, ZÀ®£ÀavÀæUÀ¼ÀÄ (¸Á»vÀåzsÁjvÀ - ¸ÁPÀëöåavÀæUÀ¼ÀÄ)
3.4 ±ÀæªÀt ªÀiÁzsÀåªÀÄ - DPÁ±ÀªÁtÂ, zsÀé¤ ¸ÀÄgÀĽUÀ¼ÀÄ
3.5 ¸Á»vÀå ¸ÀAWÀzÀ ZÀlĪÀnPÉUÀ¼ÀÄ - ¨sÁµÀt, ZÀZÁð¸ÀàzsÉð, gÀ¸À ¥Àæ±Éß, PÀ«UÉÆö×, ©wÛ ¥ÀvÀæ gÀZÀ£É, ±Á¯Á ¥ÀwæPÉ, ¨sÁµÁ DlUÀ¼À
¤ªÀðºÀuÉ, ¥ÀĸÀÛPÀ ¥ÀæzÀ±Àð£À, PÀ«dAiÀÄAw EvÁå¢
3.6 ¨sÁµÁ ¥ÀæAiÉÆÃUÁ®AiÀÄ - ¸ÀégÀÆ¥À, §¼À¸ÀĪÀ §UÉ
3.7 ¸ÀAzÀ±Àð£À, ¥ÀæªÁ¸ÀUÀ¼ÀÄ – K¥Àðr¸ÀĪÀ §UÉ
3.8 PÀ£ÀßqÀ ²PÀëPÀ£À «±ÉõÀ ¸ÁªÀÄxÀåðUÀ¼ÀÄ ªÀÄvÀÄÛ ªÀÈwÛ¥ÀgÀ ¨É¼ÀªÀtÂUÉUÉ ªÀiÁUÉÆÃð¥ÁAiÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ

WÀlPÀ 4 : ¨sÁµÁ PÀ°PÉAiÀÄ ªÀiË®å ªÀiÁ¥À£À


4.1 WÀlPÀ ¥ÀjÃPÉë – gÀZÀ£É, G¥ÀAiÉÆÃUÀ

82 
 
4.2 ªÁ¶ðPÀ ¥Àæ±Éß ¥ÀwæPÉAiÀÄ gÀZÀ£É
4.3 ¨sÁµÁ ¸ÁªÀÄxÀåðzÀ ¸ÁzsÀ£É ¥ÀjÃPÉëUÀ¼ÀÄ
4.4 £ÉÊzÁ¤PÀ ¥ÀjÃPÉëUÀ¼À gÀZÀ£É, ¥ÀjºÁgÉÆÃ¥ÁAiÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ (NzÀÄUÁjPÉAiÀÄ°è, ªÀiÁvÀÄUÁjPÉ zÉÆõÀ §gÀªÀuÉUÉAiÀÄ°è)
lÆåmÉÆÃjAiÀįï/«ZÁgÀ ¸ÀAQgÀt/ ¸É«Ä£Ágï/¥ÁæQÑPÀ¯ïì :
WÀlPÀ 1 :
• ¥ÀzÀ/£ÀÄrUÀlÄÖUÀ¼À ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉAiÀÄ AiÉÆÃd£É, ZÀZÉð
• MAzÀÄ ¥ÀzÀå ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÉUÉ CzÉà ªÀ¸ÀÄÛ PÀÄjvÀ EvÀgÀ PÀ«UÀ¼À - ¥ÀzÀå DAiÀÄÄÝ ºÉÆð¹, ZÀZÉð
• ¨ÉÆÃzsÀ£ÁA±ÀPÉÌ – PÀ°PÉ ZÀlĪÀnPÉUÀ¼À ¥ÀnÖgÀZÀ£É
• ªÀ¸ÀÄÛ ¤Ãr - ¸ÀA¨sÁµÀuÉ gÀZÀ£É ªÀÄvÀÄÛ C©ü£ÀAiÀÄ
• «¸ÀÛgÀt, ¸ÀAPÉëÃ¥Àt - ¥ÁoÀ AiÉÆÃd£ÉUÀ¼À vÀAiÀiÁjPÉ - ZÀZÉð
WÀlPÀ 2 :
• PÁUÀÄtÂvÀ zÉÆõÀ - ¤ªÁgÀuÉ PÀæªÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ
• GZÁgÀ zÉÆõÀUÀ¼ÀÄ - ¤ªÁgÀuÁPÀæªÀÄ
• zsÀé¤ ªÀÄÄ¢ævÀ ¨sÁµÀt / ªÁvÉðPÉý¹ - ¥Àæ±ÉÆßÃvÀÛgÀ (D°¸ÀÄ«PÉ ¥ÀjÃPÉë)
• ¯ÉÃR£À ªÁZÀ£À - »AªÀiÁ»w
• ¸ÀÈd£À ²Ã® §gɺÀ (PÀvÉÀ) N¢¹, ¥Àæ±ÀA¸É, ZÀZÉð
• NzÀÄUÀgÀ ¥ÀvÀæUÀ¼À£ÀÄß – N¢¹ «±Éèö¸ÀĪÀåzÀÄ
• CAPÀtUÀ¼À£ÀÄß N¢¹ «±ÉèõÀuÉ ªÀiÁqÀĪÀÅzÀÄ
• ¯ÉÃR£À ¤Ãr «ªÀıÁðvÀäPÀ NzÀÄ PÉÊUÉƼÀÄîªÀÅzÀÄ
WÀlPÀ 3 :
• ¨sÁµÁ QæÃqÉUÀ¼À ¤ªÀðºÀuÉ, ¥ÀzÀgÀAUÀUÀ¼À ( gÀa¹zÀ) ¤ªÀðºÀuÉ
• xÀmï CAvÀ ºÉý (ZÀAzÀ£À ªÁ»¤) ªÀiÁzÀj PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¨sÁµÀ¸Á»vÀå PÁAiÀÄðPÀæªÀÄUÀ¼ÀÄ
• zsÀé¤ ¸ÀÄgÀĽ D°¹ - ZÀZÉð
• CtPÀÄ ¸ÀAzÀ±Àð£À
• ZÀªÀÄQvÀ PÁqÀÄðUÀ¼À §¼ÀPÉ
• PÀ«UÉÆö×
• ±ÀæªÀå ¨sÁgÀw - ¹LLJ¯ï zsÀé¤ ¸ÀÄgÀ½ D°¹ ZÀZÉð
WÀlPÀ 4 :
• ¥Àæ±Éß ¥ÀwæPÉ ¸À«ÄÃPÉë (8,9£Éà vÀgÀUÀwAiÀÄ (±Á¯Á) ¥Àæ±Éß ¥ÀwæPÉ DzsÀj¹)
• WÀlPÀ MAzÀPÉÌ ¤Ã°£ÀPÉë vÀAiÀiÁj¸ÀĪÀåzÀÄ
• ««zsÀ ªÀiÁzÀj GzÉÝñÀ DzsÁjvÀ ªÀ¸ÀÄÛ¤µÉ× ¥Àæ±ÉßUÀ¼À gÀZÀ£É
• ¥Àæ±ÉßPÉÆÃj vÀAiÀiÁjPÉ
• £ÉÊzÁ¤PÀ ¥ÀjÃPÉë vÀAiÀiÁjPÉ
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks
¥ÀgÁªÀıÀð£À ¸À®ºÉ
1. J¸ï. PÀȵÀÚ¥Àà - ¥ÁoÀ n¥ÀàtÂUÀ¼ÀÄ
2. ¨sÀ.ªÀÄ°èPÁdÄð£À, J¸ï.J¸ï. AiÀÄzÀÄgÁd£ï - ¸ÀªÀÄPÁ°Ã£À ¨sÁgÀwÃAiÀÄ ¨sÁµÉUÀ¼À PÉÃAzÀæ ¸ÀA¸ÉÜ, ªÉÄʸÀÆgÀÄ
3. n.«. wªÉÄäUËqÀ ‘NzÀĪÀ±ÀQÛ’
4. JA. ªÀȵÀ¨sÉÃAzÀæ¸Áé«Ä - §gÉAiÀÄĪÀÅ zÁj
5. r.n. gÀAUÀ¸Áé«Ä - ¥ÀvÀæ¯ÉÃR£ÀPÀ¯É – PÀ£ÀßqÀ ¸Á»vÀå ¥ÀjµÀvï, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ

83 
 
6. £ÁUÉñï JZï.«. - ¥Àæ§AzsÀ ¥Àæ¥ÀAZÀ 1990 – zsÁgÀªÁqÀ
7. J.J. UÉÆëAzÀgÁªï - ²PÀëtzÀ°è ªÀiË®åªÀiÁ¥À£À
8. ¥ÀÄgÀĵÉÆÃvÀÛªÀÄ f – PÀ°PÉAiÀÄ vÉÆAzÀgÉUÀ¼ÀÄ, £ÀªÀPÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ
9. J£ï. ¥ÀæºÁèzÀgÁ£ï - ¯ÉÃR£À PÀ¯É
10. ¸ÀvÀå£ÁgÁAiÀÄt ªÀÄ°è¥ÀlÖt, £ÁUÀgÁdgÁªï dªÀ½ (¸ÀA) (2000) ¸ÀAªÀºÀ£À PÀ£ÀßqÀ, zÁ¸Àd£É, ªÀÄAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ
11. f. ªÉAPÀl¸ÀħâAiÀÄå ‘JgÀªÀ®Ä ¥ÀzÀPÉÆñÀ’, £ÀªÀPÀ£ÁðlPÀ ¥ÀæPÁ±À£À, ¨ÉAUÀ¼ÀÆgÀÄ
J£ï. ¹ÃvÁ®Qëöä - ¥ÀwæPÉ N¢ PÀ£ÀßqÀ PÀ°PÉ.

84 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­11:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
 
ÌWÇûSÏ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ mÉSèkÉÌiÉ 48 bÉÇOåû
bÉOûMü 1 – ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ MüÐ ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð LuÉÇ mÉëÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð
1.1 ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð : mÉëirÉ¤É mÉSèkÉÌiÉ, zÉoS-mÉËUuÉiÉïlÉ mÉSèkÉÌiÉ, QûÊ. uÉåxOû mÉSèkÉÌiÉ, urÉÉMüUhÉ, AlÉÑuÉÉS mÉSèkÉÌiÉ, rÉÉåeÉlÉÉ-
mÉSèkÉÌiÉ, mÉëÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð : mÉëzlÉ, ÌuÉuÉUhÉ, SعÉliÉ, MüjÉÉMüjÉlÉ
1.2 AlÉÑuÉÉS ÍzɤÉhÉ : E¬åzrÉ, ÃmÉ, ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð
1.3 ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ qÉåÇ qÉÉiÉ×pÉÉwÉÉ (Mü³ÉQû) MüÉ EmÉrÉÉåaÉ
1.4 EŠÉUhÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ MüÉ qÉWûiuÉ, EŠÉUhÉ qÉåÇ AzÉÑήrÉÉð, ElÉMüÉ ÌlÉUÉMüUhÉ
 
bÉOûMü 2 – AlÉÑSåzÉlÉÉiqÉMü xÉÉqÉaÉëÏ
2.1 AlÉÑSåzÉlÉÉiqÉMü xÉÉqÉaÉëÏ–ÍcɧÉ, cÉÉOïû, lÉqÉÔlÉå, zrÉÉqÉmÉOû, nsÉælÉåsÉ oÉÉåQïû, EmÉrÉÉåÌaÉiÉÉ, mÉërÉÉåaÉ
2.2 ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ qÉåÇ xÉÔcÉlÉÉ LuÉÇ xÉÇmÉëåwÉhÉ iÉMülÉÏMüÐ – UåÌQûrÉÉå, OåûmÉËUMüÊQïU,û OåûÍsÉÌuÉeÉlÉ, xÉÇaÉhÉMü, CÇOûUlÉåOû, xqÉÉOïû
osÉäMüoÉÉåQïû, EmÉrÉÉåÌaÉiÉÉ, mÉërÉÉåaÉ
2.3 UåÌQûAÉå mÉÉPû, SÕUSzÉïlÉ mÉÉPû, uÉÏÌQûrÉÉå mÉÉPû
2.4 mÉÉPèûrÉxÉWûaÉÉqÉÏ Ì¢ürÉÉLÆ, EmÉrÉÉåÌaÉiÉÉ, ÍzɤÉMü MüÐ pÉÔÍqÉMüÉ

bÉOûMü 3 – ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ qÉåÇ qÉÔsrÉÉÇMülÉ


3.1 qÉÔsrÉÉÇMülÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð, aÉÑhÉSÉåwÉ
3.2 mÉëzlÉmÉ§É MüÐ ÌuÉzÉåwÉiÉÉLÆ, mÉëzlÉ-mÉ§É ÌlÉqÉÉïhÉ, AÇMüpÉÉU, lÉÏsÉlÉYzÉÉ, bÉOûMü MüxÉÉæOûÏ MüÐ xÉÇMüsmÉlÉÉ AÉæU xÉÇUcÉlÉÉ,
3.3 ÌlÉSÉlÉÉiqÉMü ÍzɤÉhÉ : E¬åzrÉ, ÌlÉSÉlÉ Måü ÃmÉ, ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð
3.4 EmÉcÉÉUÉiqÉMü ÍzɤÉhÉ : E¬åzrÉ, qÉWûiuÉ, ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð

bÉOûMü 4 – ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉMü


4.1 ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉMü MüÐ rÉÉåarÉiÉÉ, urÉÉuÉxÉÉÌrÉMü aÉÑhÉ
4.2 AÌWÇûSÏ mÉëSåzÉ qÉåÇ ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉMü Måü E¨ÉUSÉÌrÉiuÉ AÉæU cÉÑlÉÉæÌiÉrÉÉð
4.3 ÌWÇûSÏ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ qÉåÇ aÉÑhÉÉiqÉMüiÉÉ uÉ×ή WåûiÉÑ MüÉrÉï¢üqÉ-xÉÇaÉÉå¸Ï, MüÉrÉïzÉÉsÉÉ, mÉëÍzɤÉhÉ, cÉcÉÉïxɧÉ
4.4 ÌWÇûSÏ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ ²ÉUÉ qÉÔsrÉÉåÇ MüÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ

mÉëS¨É MüÉrÉï / mÉëÉirÉͤÉMü MüÉrÉï


bÉOûMü 1 :
• urÉÉMüUhÉ-AlÉÑuÉÉS mÉSèkÉÌiÉ MüÉ mÉërÉÉåaÉ
• ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ qÉåÇ qÉÉiÉ×pÉÉwÉÉ (Mü³ÉQû Måü) mÉërÉÉåaÉ Måü AÉkÉÉU mÉU xÉÏ.QûÏ. mÉëxiÉÑÌiÉMüUhÉ
• ÌMüxÉÏ LMü aɱ mÉÉPû MüÉ AlÉÑuÉÉS
• pÉÉwÉÉ mÉërÉÉåaÉzÉÉsÉÉ AÉæU EŠÉUhÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ

bÉOûMü 2:
• AlÉÑSåzÉlÉÉiqÉMü xÉÉqÉÌaÉërÉÉð
• xqÉÉOïû osÉäMüoÉÉåQïû

85 
 
• xÉÇaÉhÉMü MüÉ ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ qÉåÇ mÉërÉÉåaÉ
• UåÌQûrÉÉå mÉëxÉÉUhÉ Måü ÍsÉL ÌWÇûSÏ mÉÉPû MüÐ iÉærÉÉUÏ

bÉOûMü 3 :
• qÉÔsrÉÉÇMülÉ MüÐ ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð LuÉÇ aÉÑhÉ SÉåwÉ
• ÌlÉSÉlÉÉiqÉMü ÍzɤÉhÉ uÉ EmÉcÉÉUÉiqÉMü ÍzɤÉhÉ MüÐ ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð
• lÉÏsÉlɤÉÉ, mÉëzlÉ mÉ§É ÌlÉqÉÉïhÉ AÉæU qÉÔsrÉÉÇMülÉ
• bÉOûMü MüxÉÉæOûÏ MüÐ xÉÇUcÉlÉÉ iÉjÉÉ MüÉrÉïuÉÉWûÏ

bÉOûMü 4:
• ÌWÇûSÏ Måü ¥ÉÉlÉmÉÏPû mÉÑUxMüÉU mÉëÉmiÉ xÉÉÌWûirÉMüÉU
• M×üwhÉpÉÌ£ü rÉÉ UÉqÉpÉÌ£ü zÉÉZÉÉ Måü mÉëqÉÑZÉ MüÌuÉrÉÉåÇ MüÉ mÉÉËUcÉrÉ
• ÌWÇûSÏ xÉÉÌWûirÉMüÉU MüÉ xÉɤÉÉiMüÉU
• Ì¢ürÉÉiqÉMü AlÉÑxÉÇkÉÉlÉ (ÌMüxÉÏ LMü xÉqÉxrÉÉ mÉU)

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

xÉÇSpÉï aÉëljÉ xÉÔcÉÏ


1) QûÊ. qÉÇaÉsÉ EqÉÉ, (2012), ÌWûlSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ, AÉrÉï oÉÑMü ÌQûmÉÉå, MüUÉåsÉoÉÉaÉ, lÉD ÌSssÉÏ|
2) QûÊ. mÉÉhQåûrÉ UÉqÉzÉMüsÉ,(2010), lÉÔiÉlÉ ÌWûlSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ, ÌuÉlÉÉåS mÉÑxiÉMü qÉÇÌSU ÍzɤÉhÉ AÉaÉUÉ |
3) QûÊ.zÉqÉÉï, ÍzÉuÉqÉÔÌiÉï, (2010), ÌWûlSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð, lÉÏsÉMüqÉsÉ mÉÎosÉMåüzÉlÉxÉ mÉëÉrÉuÉåOû ÍsÉÍqÉOåûQû, lÉD ÌSssÉÏ|
4) QûÊ. zÉqÉÉï, AÉU.L. xÉÔ¤qÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ ²ÉUÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ AprÉÉxÉ, xÉÉÌWûirÉ mÉëMüÉzÉlÉ, AÉaÉUÉ |
5) QûÊ. mÉcÉÉæUÏ ÌaÉËUzÉ, QûÊ. zÉqÉÉï xÉÏqÉÉ; (2012), ÌWûlSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ, AÉU.sÉÉsÉ oÉÑMü ÌQûmÉÉå, qÉåUP |
6) QûÊ. SåzÉmÉÉÇQåû, xÉÑsÉÉåcÉlÉÉ, (2007), urÉÉuÉWûÉËUMü ÌWÇûSÏ urÉÉMüUhÉ UÉuÉÉ mÉëMüÉzÉlÉ, MüÉåsWûÉmÉÑU |
7) QûÊ. AaÉëuÉÉsÉ, sÉiÉÉ, (2009), pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ LuÉÇ ÍzɤÉhÉ ÌuÉÍkÉrÉÉð, LcÉ.mÉÏ. pÉÉaÉïuÉ oÉÑMü WûÉExÉ, AÉaÉUÉ |
8) QûÊ. SÏÌmÉMüÉ, (2009), ÌWÇûSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ, xÉÇeÉrÉ mÉÎosÉMåüzÉlxÉ AÉaÉUÉ |
9) QûÊ.zÉqÉÉï aÉÇaÉÉUÉqÉ, QûÊ.pÉÉU²ÉeÉ xÉÑkÉÏU MÑüqÉÉU, (2008) ÌWûlSÏ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉhÉ, LcÉ.mÉÏ. pÉÉaÉïuÉ oÉÑMü WûÉExÉ,
AÉaÉUÉ |
10) QûÊ. SÒoÉå, xÉirÉlÉÉUÉrÉhÉ zÉUiÉålSÒ, ÌWûlSÏ ÍzɤÉhÉ, xÉÉÌWûirÉ mÉëMüÉzÉlÉ, AÉaÉUÉ |

 
86 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­11:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉkSiÉÏ
48 iÉÉxÉ
bÉOûMü 1 – qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉkSiÉÏ uÉ mÉërÉÑYirÉÉ
1.1 qÉUÉPûÏ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcÉÏ iÉiuÉå uÉ xÉÔ§Éå
1.2 qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcrÉÉ mÉkSiÉÏ (lÉÉšÏMüUhÉ, MüjÉÉMüjÉlÉ, UxÉaÉëWûhÉ, cÉcÉÉï, urÉÉZrÉÉlÉ, ESèaÉÉqÉÏ AuÉaÉÉqÉÏ)
pÉÉÌwÉMü ZÉåV
1.3 mÉërÉÑYirÉÉ; mÉëzlÉ, ESÉWûUhÉ, xmÉ̹MüUhÉ
1.4 EŠÉUhÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcÉå qÉWûiuÉ, EŠÉUhÉåiÉÏsÉ AzÉÑkSiÉÉ xÉÑkÉÉUhrÉÉxÉÉPûÏ EmÉÉrÉ

bÉOûMü 2 – qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcÉÏ xÉÉkÉlÉå


2.1 NûÉmÉÏsÉ xÉÉÌWûirÉ, uÉרÉmɧÉå, qÉÉÍxÉMåü, WûxiÉmÉÑÎxiÉMüÉ, zÉoSMüÉåwÉ, ÌuÉzuÉMüÉåwÉ
2.2 qÉUÉPûÏ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ qÉÉÌWûiÉÏ AÉÍhÉ xÉÇmÉëåwÉhÉ iÉǧɥÉÉlÉÉcÉÉ uÉÉmÉU – AÉMüÉzÉuÉÉhÉÏ, SÕUSzÉïlÉ, xÉÇaÉhÉMü, OåûmÉËUMüÊQïûU,
ClOûUlÉåOû, xqÉÉOïû osÉðMüoÉÉåQïû
2.3 uÉÉXûqÉrÉ qÉÇQûVû : E̬¹rÉå, EmÉ¢üqÉ, qÉWûiuÉ
2.4 pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ AkrÉrÉlÉÉxÉÉPûÏ xÉWûzÉÉsÉårÉ MüÉrÉï¢üqÉ
bÉOûMü 3 – qÉÔsrÉqÉÉmÉlÉ
3.1 qÉÔsrÉqÉÉmÉlÉ : xÉÇMüsmÉlÉÉ, AÉuÉzrÉMüiÉÉ, E̬¹
3.2 pÉÉwÉÉ ÌuÉwÉrÉiÉÏsÉ qÉÔsrÉqÉÉmÉlÉÉcÉå xuÉÃmÉ
3.3 mÉëzlÉÉÇcÉå mÉëMüÉU, aÉÑhÉSÉåwÉ
3.4 mÉUϤÉÉÇcÉå ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ, E̬¹ÉlÉÑxÉÉU aÉÑhÉ ÌuÉpÉÉaÉhÉÏ uÉ mÉëzlÉxÉÇZrÉÉ, xÉÇÌuÉkÉÉlÉlÉMiÉÉ

bÉOûMü 4 – qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉåcÉÉ ÍzɤÉMü


4.1 qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉMü : mÉɧÉiÉÉ, aÉÑhÉ uÉæÍzɹrÉå
4.2 AqÉUÉPûÏ mÉëÉÇiÉiÉÏsÉ qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ ÍzɤÉMüÉÇcrÉÉ xÉqÉxrÉÉ uÉ xÉqÉÉkÉÉlÉ
4.3 qÉUÉPûÏ ÍzɤÉMü uÉ urÉuÉxÉÉÌrÉMü E³ÉÌiÉ
4.4 qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉåqÉÑVåû qÉÔsrÉÉÇcÉÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ

S¨É MüÉrÉï / mÉëÉirÉͤÉMü MüÉrÉï


bÉOûMü 1 :
• qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉÉcrÉÉ mÉkSiÉÏ ÌuÉwÉrÉÏ cÉcÉÉï MüUÉ.
• EŠÉUhÉ AÉÍhÉ pÉÉwÉÉ mÉërÉÉåaÉ zÉÉVûÉ rÉÉuÉUiÉÏ S¨É MüÉrÉï mÉëxiÉÑiÉ MüUÉ
• pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉërÉÑYirÉÉÇcÉÉ EmÉrÉÉåaÉ MüÃlÉ mÉÉPû mÉëxiÉÑiÉ MüUÉ..

bÉOûMü 2:
• qÉUÉPûÏ xÉÉÌWûirÉÉuÉU AÉkÉÉËUiÉ WûxiÉmÉÑÎxiÉMüÉ iÉrÉÉU MüUÉ.
• AÉMüÉzÉuÉÉhÉÏ / SÕUSzÉïlÉ uÉU mÉëxÉÉËUiÉ MüUhrÉÉxÉÉPûÏ mÉÉPû ÌlÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ iÉrÉÉU MüUÉ.
• zÉæ¤ÉÍhÉMü xÉWûsÉÏcÉå AÉrÉÉåeÉlÉ MüUÉ.

bÉOûMü 3 :
• lÉuÉÏlÉ qÉÔsrÉqÉÉmÉlÉÉcrÉÉ mÉkSiÉÏÇcÉÏ qÉÉÌWûiÉÏ ÍsÉWûÉ.
87 
 
• 8-9 uÉÏÇ qÉUÉPûÏ ÌuÉwÉrÉÉxÉÉPûÏ mÉëzlÉmȨ́ÉMüÉ iÉrÉÉU MüUÉ.
• xÉÇÌuÉkÉÉlÉiÉMiÉÉ iÉrÉÉU MüUÉ.

bÉOûMü 4:
• qÉUÉPûÏ ÍzɤÉMüÉÇcÉÉ pÉåOûÏ bÉåFlÉ qÉUÉPûÏ ÍzɤÉhÉÉxÉÉPûÏ irÉÉÇcÉå qÉÉaÉïSzÉïlÉ brÉÉ uÉ ÍsÉWÒûlÉ mÉëxiÉÑiÉ MüUÉ.
• AqÉUÉPûÏ mÉëÉÇiÉÉiÉÏsÉ qÉUÉPûÏ ÍzɤÉMüÉÇcrÉÉ xÉqÉxrÉåuÉU cÉcÉÉï MüUÉ.
• qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉåqÉÑVåû qÉÔsrÉÉÇcÉÉ ÌuÉMüÉxÉ MüxÉÉ WûÉåDsÉ ESÉWûUhÉ SåFlÉ xmɹ MüUÉ,

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

xÉÇSpÉï aÉëljÉ
a. AMüÉåsÉMüU aÉ.ÌuÉ. qÉUÉPûÏcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ, (1977), ÎuWûlÉxÉ mÉëMüÉzÉlÉ, mÉÑhÉå.
b. MÑÇüQûsÉå qÉ. oÉÉ., qÉUÉPûÏcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ, (1991), ´ÉÏ ÌuÉ±É mÉëMüÉzÉlÉ, mÉÑhÉå.
c. mÉÉOûÏsÉ sÉÏsÉÉ, qÉÉiÉ×pÉÉwÉåcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ, (1964), ÎuWûlÉxÉ mÉëMüÉzÉlÉ, mÉÑhÉå.
d. xÉUSåzÉqÉÑZÉ urÉÇ. ÌuÉ., qÉÉiÉ×pÉÉwÉÉ AkrÉrÉlÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ, (1971), lÉÏsÉMÇüPû mÉëMüÉzÉlÉ, mÉÑhÉå.
e. xÉÉPåû S. §rÉ., qÉUÉPûÏ pÉÉwÉåcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ, (1960), PûÉMÔüU AÉÍhÉ MÇümÉlÉÏ, AqÉUÉuÉiÉÏ.
f. QûÊ. MüUÇSÏMüU xÉÑ. qÉUÉPûÏ AÉzÉrÉ AkrÉÉmÉlÉ mÉ®iÉÏ, (1996) (2005), TüQûMåü mÉëMüÉzÉlÉ, MüÉåsWûÉmÉÔU.
g. QûÉÇaÉå cÉÇSìMÑüqÉÉU, qÉÉiÉ×pÉÉwÉåcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ, (1953), ÍcɧÉzÉÉVûÉ mÉëåxÉ, mÉÑhÉå.
h. TüOûMü qÉ. ÌuÉ., qÉUÉPûÏ MüÌuÉiÉåcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ, (1951), qÉÊQûlÉï oÉÑMü ÌQûmÉÉå, mÉÑhÉå.
i. eÉÉåzÉÏ AlÉÇiÉ, AÉzÉrÉrÉÑ£ü AkrÉÉmÉlÉ (1999).
j. QûÊ. oÉUMüsÉå lÉÍsÉlÉÏ, QûÊ. UÉqÉSÉxÉ, qÉÉiÉ×pÉÉwÉÉ qÉUÉPûÏcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ, (2001), zÉÉx§ÉÏrÉ ÌuÉzsÉåwÉhÉ.
k. AÉVÇûSMüU eÉrÉMÑüqÉÉU, ÍzɤÉhÉÉÇcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ zÉÉx§É (2010),
l. cÉÉæaÉÑsÉå xÉÑlÉÇSÉ, qÉÉiÉ×pÉÉwÉÉ qÉUÉPûÏcÉå AkrÉÉmÉlÉ (2014), xÉÑUeÉ pÉÔwÉhÉ mÉÎosÉzÉxÉï, oÉåsÉaÉÉðuÉ
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
88 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course
Semester –II
Course-11: Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS-I)
PHYSICAL SCIENCE
48 Hours
Unit:1 Curriculum and Co-Curricular Activities in PhysicalScience
1.1 Curriculum
1.1.1 Curriculum : Meaning, definition Importance & principles
1.1.2 Organisation of curriculum : psychological, logical , spiral & topical
1.2 Correlation of physical science with school subjects : Meaning , Importance & Types
1.3 Trends in curriculum : PSSC, CHEM, NCERT -2010 & NCFTE-2010 for physical science,
1.4 Co-curricular activities :
1.4.1 Field trips – Meaning, advantages & disadvantages
1.4.2 Science exhibition : Meaning, organization & Importance
1.4.3 Physical science Museum – Meaning , organization and importance

Unit -2 Teaching & Learning Resources of Physical Science


2.1 Physical science laboratory
2.1.1 Importance of laboratory
2.1.2 Characteristics of an Ideal Physical science laboratory
2.1.3 Storage of chemicals & equipments
2.1.4 Precautions to be taken in laboratory
2.1.5 Laboratory records – Meaning, types & Maintenance
2.1.6 Improvised apparatus : concept, preparation and importance
2.2 Science text books- Meaning, Functions, characteristics
2.3 Work books- Meaning, Types & Importance
2.4 Audio – Visual equipments
2.4.1 Charts
2.4.2 Models
2.4.3 OHP Transparencies
2.4.4 CD’s and DVD’s
2.4.5 Web -2.0 technologies, Youtube, Face book, Wikipedia, Twitter. ( Meaning, & importance )

Unit 3 Evaluation in Physical Science


3.1 Evaluation : Meaning, Importance & characteristics of a good test
3.2 Unit Test –Meaning, Preparation using blue print
3.3 Remedial planning teaching – Meaning, organization & uses
3.4 Evaluation of practical work
3.5 Continues and comprehensive evaluation ( CCE ) : concept, objectives and its importance
Unit 4 Physical Science Teacher
4.1 Characteristics of an ideal physical science teacher
4.2 Avenues for Professional growth of physical science teacher
4.3 Role of physical science teacher
4.3.1 Inspection & supervision
4.3.2 Quiz master
4.3.3 NTSS trainer
4.4 General problems of physical science teacher in Karnataka State solutions to overcome them.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit –I
• critical analysis of physical science text book of viii or ix standard of Karnataka state

Unit-II
• Work book or Instructional kit
89 
 
• Survey of laboratory facilities of any two secondary school with practicle suggestion for improvement
• Preparation of working model

Unit III
• Preparation of well balanced question papers of secondary school

Unit IV
4.1 Conducting the quiz competations
4.2 Organising science club of conducting activities and talks on
a) NTSE
b) Careers in science
c) Science exhibition
d) Bio-graphics of scientists
e) Field trips
f) In service teacher programme

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

90 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course
Semester –II
Course-11: Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS-I)
SANSKRIT
48 hours
Unit-I Methods of Teaching Sanskrit
1.1 Teaching of prose – pathashala Method, textbook method, direct Method and translation method.
1.2 Teaching of poetry- analytic method, synthetic method and integrated method.
1.3 Teaching of Drama- Adarshanatyanidhi and Abhinayavidhi.
1.4 Importance of memorization in Sanskrit teaching-learning process.

Unit-2 Instructional Resources and Co-Curricular Activities


2.1 Instructional resources in Sanskrit teaching and its importance.
2.2 Language Laboratory – structure and importance of language Laboratory.
2.3 Importance of Co-Curricular activities in the teaching of Sanskrit – Co- Curricular activities in
Sanskrit teaching.
2.4 Sanskrit Sambhaashana Shibira- Characteristics and Importance.

Unit-3 Evaluation in Language


3.1 Continuous Evaluation and comprehensive Evaluation (CCE) – Concept, Characteristics of
good Evaluation.
3.2 Evaluation of language skills.
3.3 Importance of essay type questions in the Evaluation of Sanskrit Language.
3.4 Importance of Unit test.

Unit-4 Sanskrit Teacher


4.1 Special competencies of Sanskrit Teacher
4.2 Good characteristics of Sanskrit teacher.
4.3 Importance of relationships of Sanskrit teacher with other subject teachers.
4.4 Need for in-service training programme.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit 1:
• Collect 25 Subhashitas of Sanskrit and analyse them.

Unit 2:
• Prepare 2 charts in Sanskrit teaching and explain their use in Sanskrit teaching.

Unit 3:
• Write a lesson plan on CCE

Unit 4:
• Prepare a report on the challenges faced by Sanskrit teacher
Assignments: (Any one)
1. Preparations of Dictionaries: Synonyms and Antonyms
2. Collection of Sanskrit Shlokas.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks
91 
 
References:
1. Apte D.G. (2000) Teaching of Sanskrit. Bombay : Padma Publications.
2. Shanbhag D.N. (2000) Subhoda Sanskrit Vyakarana. Dharwad: Bharat Book
Depot & Publications.
3. Hulkerikar. G.S. (1998) The problems of Sanskrit Teaching. Kolhapur: Bharat
Book Depot.
4. Narasimharao. K.V.V.L. (1997) Evaluation in Language Education, Mysore:
CIIL publications.
5. Patnayak.P.(1997) Language Curriculum, Mysore: CIIL Publications.
6. Ramashakal Pandeya, (2000) Sanskrit Shikshan, Agra: Pustaka Mandir.
7. Ramavarmaraja, K. (2000) The Teaching of Sanskrit, Madras: Sanskrit Education Society.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

92 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­11:  Pedagogy of School Subject – I (POSS­I) 
URDU
48 Hours
Unit 1 Teaching of Grammar and methods of teaching Urdu literature
1.1 Aims and objectives of Urdu grammar
1.2 Methods of teaching of Urdu grammar
1.3 Objectives :mastery over the Urdu language, vocabulary building comprehension and appreciation recitation
( criticism ), summarising of teaching prose
1.3.1 Prose : Essay, story, role playing, lecture method, discussion method, indective and deductive method,
project method and question answer method.
1.4 Biography of famous aouthors and poets : Mirza Galib, Altaf Husain Hali, Sir Sayed Ahmed Khan, Abul
Kalam Azad
Unit 2 : The Urdu Teacher
1.1 Qualities and qualification of Urdu teacher
1.2 Professional growth of Urdu teacher in service training programmes : programmes, seminars, conferences,
workshop ect.
1.3 Urdu teacher organisation their role in the professional growth of the teacher
1.4 Academic problems of Urdu teacher
Unit 3 Evaluation in Urdu language concept, importance and examination
3.1 Different types of test : Essay type, short answer type, objective type
3.2 Tests of evaluate, pupil linguistic ability, unit test, diagnostic test
3.3 Comprehensive contains evaluation : meaning important and objectives
3.4 Types and tools and techniques of CCE evaluation
Unit 4 Urdu text books
4.1 Concept important, details of Urdu text book
4.2 Principals of Urdu text book and construction
4.3 Characteristics of good text book, a critical evaluation of the current text book for 8th,9th, 10th .
4.4 Critical study and analysed text book for secondary school of Karnataka state.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit 1
• Instructional material to teach language Urdu skill / structure / vocabulary
• Grammar games / Grammar practice activities
• Learning Vocabulary– dictionary using habits collocation and word familes,idioms and
phrases,affixes,synonyms and antonyms, compound words, vocabulary notebook
• Planning and execution of language Urdu

Unit 2
• Preparation of scrap book for teaching of Urdu language
• Teaching body language using any unit then prepare CD
• Visit and report on functions and use of Urdu language laboratory
• Common errors in speech and writing
• Listen and draw pictures, listen and mime or enact and narrate or dramatize

Unit 3
• Preparation of trainees for teaching Urdu
• Preparing assessment tools
93 
 
• Constructing test items
• Designing test papers
• Formative assessment should be carried out using checklists, observation schedules, rating scales.
Summative assessment may be carried out through oral and written test

Unit 4
• Critically analysing the 8th standard text book
• Using textbooks to develop language skills, analysing a unit and designing supplementary activities
• Content analysis of secondary school
• Critically analysing the 9th standard text book

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

References :
1 Akthar Ansar (1986) studies in language and languge teaching : Hyderbad Neelkalam book unit
publishers.
2 Ibabat – Barebari (2002 )Urdu Tanqueed – Ka – Irtaka, Aligar Educational book House
3 Mirza Khaleed Ahmed Saif (1995) Urdu Zuban Ki Tareekh, Aligar Educational book House
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

94 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­12:  Pedagogy of School Subject – II (POSS-II)
BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE
48 Hours
Unit 1 Curriculum
1.1 Meaning and principles of curriculum
1.2 Types of Organization of Content- Psychological, Spiral
1.3 Trends in Biology Curriculum Construction- B.S.C.S, Nuffield, NCF - 2005
1.4 Integration of Biology with other school subjects

Unit 2 Activities in Teaching Biology


2.1 Curricular activities -Organization and maintenance of Bio-Science Lab; Preservation of
specimen(procedure any two )
2.2 Project Activities – Improvisation of Biology apparatus- Meaning, importance, Procedure; Aquarium,
Vivevarium, Terrarium, Bio museum and medicinal plants garden .Maintenance and importance
2.3 Co- curricular Activities – Bio-Science Club – Organization & its activities
2.4 Development of scientific attitude through Nature Study, Bird Watching, Collection and Preservation of
Specimens; Bonsai –Meaning and importance

Unit 3 Evaluation
3.1 Continuous and comprehensive evaluation in Biology; Meaning, objectives, importance and model.
3.2 Types of Tests: Essay Type, Short answer and Objective Type – Meaning & Merits; Construction of Unit
Test – Meaning and preparation of Blue Print
3.3 Diagnostic testing and remedial measures
3.4 Talent Search Programme in Biology, National Means Merit Scheme (NMMS) 8th Std; National Talent
Search Exam (NTSE) 10th Std

Unit 4 Biology Teacher


4.1 Competencies of a biology teacher as per NCTE; Opportunities for professional growth –Seminars,
Conferences, Workshop, Refreshes and Orientation Courses
4.2 Academic problems of Biology Teacher
4.3 Commitments – Learner, Professional excellence (Membership for various Science bodies), Community.
4.4 E-Resource in Bio-Science for Secondary School level.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit:I
• Analysis of content of 8th and 9th standard biology with special reference to components of scientific
knowledge and learning activities
• Analysis of NCF 2005 science curriculum
• Discussion on historical perspective of Biology curriculum with special reference to BSCS (Biological
Science curriculum survey)
• NCFTE 2009 Science curriculum

Unit:II
• Preparation of any two biology based improvised apparatus of your choice and write the procedure
• Set up and maintenance of aquarium.
• Conducting Science Club activities
• Collection and preservation of biology specimen.

Unit:III
• Preparation of different types of questions for different levels of learning and analysis
95 
 
• Procedure to be followed for item analysis and its interpretation Critical analysis of the existing 10th
standard question papers-Preparation of a diagnostic test
• Preparation of blue print
• Preparation of a well balanced question paper for 8th and 9th standard
• Orientation on NTS examination

Unit:IV
• Expected and existing competences of a biology teacher
• Available opportunities for professional growth (at district, state and national level)
• Discussion on kind of support available form school management, head master, colleagues, students and
community members to take up science related action research or projects or other related research works
as part of their professional growth
• Preparation of self evaluation tool

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

References:
• Ahmad. J (2009) – Teaching Of Biological Sciences. New Delhi: PHI Learning Private Limited.
• Bruce Joyees, Marsha Weil(1985 & 1990),- Models of Teaching, New Delhi Printice Hall of India.
• Chikkara & Sharma (1989) Teaching Of Biology, Ludhiyana: Prakash Bros.
• Guddalli N M (1993) Jeeva Vijnyana Bodhane. Gadag: Vidyanidhi Prakashana.
• K.Yadav (1995) Teaching Of Life Sciences, New Delhi: Anmol Pub.
• Mangal S.K., (1997) Teaching Of Physical & Lie Sciences, New Delhi: Avg. Book Depot.
• Miller & Blaydes (1962) Methods & Materials for teaching Of Biological Science, New Delhi: Tata Mc.
Grahill Pub. Co
• NCERT (1982) Teaching Of Science in Secondary Schools, New Delhi.
• Rabanal Nelakanth (2002) Jeeva Vijnyana Bodhane. Gadag: Vidyanidhi Prakashana.
• T.L.Green (1965) Teaching Of Biology in Tropical Secondary Schools. London: Oxford University
Press.
• UNESCO (1978) New Source Book of Science Teaching, New Delhi: Oxford & BH Pub. Ltd.

96 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­12:  Pedagogy of School Subject – II (POSS­II) 
GEOGRAPHY AND ECONOMICS
48 Hours
Objectives:
1. Acquire the knowledge of Geography curriculum.
2. Acquire the knowledge of Geography Grammar.
3. Develop skills in equipping the geography (1) Museum (2) Room.
4. Acquire the qualities of good Geography teacher.
5. Know about content of Secondary School Geography and its critical study of text-book.

UNIT-1. Curriculum development in Geography


1.1. Principles of Curriculum construction.
1.2. Organization of content of the curriculum-Psychological, Logical, and Spiral.
1.3. view of NCF (2005) regarding geography and economics curriculum
1.4. Co-relation of Geography and History, Science, Mathematics and Languages.

UNIT-2. Geography Teacher and professional growth


2.1. Qualification and qualities of Geography Teacher- His Training and Practical experience.
2.2. Programmes for Professional growth of a Geography Teacher.
2.3. Geographical Grammar.
2.4. Problems of Geography Teacher.
UNIT-3. Co-curricular activities in teaching Geography and Economics
3.1. Geography Museum: Meaning, need and its importance, Equipments and arrangements.
3.2. Geography Room: Importance, Planning, Equipments and arrangements.
3.3. Geography based hobbies.
3.4. Geography club Activities.

UNIT -4. Evaluation in teaching Geography and Economics


4.1. Meaning and importance of Evaluation.
4.2. Types of Evaluation-Essay types. Short answer type, Objective types and continues and comprehensive
evaluation: meaning, importants and procedures.
4.3. Preparation of Unit test- Construction of test items, Diagnostics test and remedial teaching.
4.4. Critical study of Geography text book of 8th to 10th standard in Karnataka State.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit 1
• Justify the correlation between geography and other school subjects with examples
• List out the defects of high school curriculum
• Views of NCF regarding geography and economics curriculum
Unit 2
• Analysis of conventional signs and symbols of geography
• List out the problems of geography teacher
• Discuss about the qualifications and qualities of geography teacher.
Unit 3
• Visit to commercial centres
• Preparation of album of different countries: Flags, stamps, coins, currency ect.
• Visit to special institution like agricultural school, market mining area, horticultural dept
Unit 4
• Construction of unit test

97 
 
• Critical study of geography of 8th or 9th standard
• Critical study of present evaluation system

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

References
• Bliar, Thomas A.,(1951), Climatology: General and Regional , New York, Prentice-Hall Inc.
• Brianlt, E.W. and D.W.Shave, (1965), Geography in and out of School, London, Harrap and Co.
• Brock., Jan O.M.(1965),Geography. Its Scope and Spirit, Ohio, Charles E. Merrill
• Charley. R.J. and P. Hagget (Eds) (1967), Frontiers in Geographical Teaching, Methuen Educational Ltd.
• Cons, G.J.(1957) Hand book for Geography Teacher, London, Methuen Educational Ltd.
• Gabler, Robert, et al , (1945), Introduction to Physical Geography. San Francisco , Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
• Garnet Ohio, (1965) Fundamental in School Geography, London, Harrap and Co.
• Gospil, G.H. (1965) The teaching of Geography, London, Macmillan and Co.
• Gravees, N.J. ((1971) Geography in Secondary Education, London, Geography Association.
• Graves, N.J. (1972) , New Movement in the Study and Teaching of Geography , Australia, F.W.Cheshire
Publishing Printing Ltd.
• Haggettt, P., (1972) Geography : A Modern Syntheses, New York,Harper and Row.
• Indian National Committee for Geography, (1968) Indian Regional Studies, Calcuta, 21st IGU Publication.
• Indian National Committee for Geography, (1968), Developing Countries of the World Calcutta, 21st IGU
Publication.
• Indian National Committee for Geography , (1968) Mountains and Rivers of India, Calcutta, 21st IGU
Publication.
• Kendeaw, W.G.(1938) Climatology, London, Oxford University Press.
• Lake Philip. (1974), Physical Geography, Madras, Macmillan Co. of India Ltd.
• Leong, Goh, Cheug, (1971) Certification Physical and Human Geography, Singapore, Oxford University
Press’
• Long and Robertson, (1968) , Teaching of Geography, London, Heinemannn Educational Books Ltd.
• Long M.L. (Ed) (1974), Handbook for Geography Teachers, London Methuen Educational Ltd.
• Macnee E.A., (1953) Teaching of Geography, London, Oxford University Press.
• Robinson, Arthur H. (1960) Elements of Cartography, New York, John Wiley and Sons Inc.
• Seninthirajah, N. and J. Weira, (1971) Evaluation in Geography, Ontario, Ontario Institute of Education.
• Standing Sub-committee in Geography, (194), Handbook for Geography Teacher, London, Methuen
Educational Ltd.
• Treqartha, Gelnn T., (1954) An Introduction to climate, New York, McGraw Hill Book Company Inc.
• UNESCO (1965) Source Book for Geography Teaching. London, Longman, Longman Co.
• Wheeler, Jr. J. Renton Kostabade and Richard S. Thoman (1969), Regional Geography of the World, New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc.
• Woolridge, S.W. and W.G.East, (1951) The Spirit and Purpose of Geography, New York, Hutchinson.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
98 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­12:  Pedagogy of School Subject – II (POSS­II) 
HISTORY AND CIVICS
48 Hours

Unit – I Curriculum and Resources of Teaching History Political Science and Sociology
1.1 Meaning and principles of selection and organization of content- chronological, concentric, biographical
1.2 History, political science and sociology text book and its characteristics
1.3 Co curricular activities- organizing field trip, visits, excursion and other co curricular activities, hobby
clubs
1.4 A.V Aids : Maps, pictures, charts, models, time line, family tree chart and films, T.V, Multimedia and
Smart board- their importance procedure & uses

Unit – II Correlation of History with Other Subjects  


2.1 Meaning and importance of correlation
2.2 Types of correlation
2.3 Correlation of History with geography, economics and literature
2.4 Current events

Unit – III History, Political Science and Sociology Teacher


3.1 Qualification, qualities and competencies of History teacher
3.2 Professional growth - seminars, workshops, orientation, refresher course, in service
training, talent search, membership of History clubs and research mindedness.
3.3 Relationship of History teacher with students and co workers, head master and
community
3.4 academic problems of history, political science and sociology
 
Unit - IV Evaluation & Co Curricular Activities in History, Sociology and PoliticalScience 
4.1 Meaning and importance of evaluation
4.2 Continuous Comprehensive Evaluation-meaning, importance, objectives,tools and techniques of CCE
4.3 Unit Test – meaning, importance, Blue- print etc
4.4 Importance of organizing Fieldtrip, visits, excursions, co-curricular activities, History based hobby
clubs

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit 1
• Critical review of HPS content of present secondary school.(6th to 9th Std)
• Preparation of models/ Time line in HPS
• Collection of learning materials related to HPS and report.
• Prepare any PPT lesson for HPS.
• Conducting HPS club activities & report.
Unit 2
• Illustrate co-relation of History with other school subjects.
Unit 3
• Report on academic problems facing HPS teacher in present context.
Unit 4
• Visit to secondary School and collect information about CCE & report.
• Prepare a Unit test on any one topic of HPS with analysis and interpretation of test items.
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
99 
 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks
 
References
1. Agarwal J. C. (2002) Teaching of History, Prakash Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Arora R.L. (1990) Teaching of History, Prakash Brother ltd.
3. Habib S.B. (2006) Itihas mattu Pouraneeiti Bhodhane, Pradeep Prakashan, Gadag
4. Kochhar S.K. - Teaching of History, sterling publisher, New Delhi.
5. Kochhar S.K. - Teaching of social studies, sterling publisher, New Delhi.
6. Kongawad N.B. (2011) Itihas mattu Pouraneeiti Bhodhane, Vidyanidhi Prakashana, Gadag
7. N.C.E.R.T. (1970) effective teaching of History in India a Hand Book for History Teaching.
8. Roddannavar J.G. (2009) Methods of Teaching History and civics, Vidyanidhi Prakashana, Gadag
9. Rudresh B.S. (2010) Itihas mattu Pouraneeiti Bhodhane, Vidyanidhi Prakashana, Gadag
10. Shaida B.D. and Shaib Sing - Teaching of History Civics, Vidyanidhi Prakashana, Gadag
11. Thimmareddy K. - Teaching, Gadag
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
100 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –II  
Course­12:  Pedagogy of School Subject – II (POSS­II) 
MATHEMATICS
             
 
48 Hours
UNIT - 5 Curriculum Development in Mathematics
5.1 Curriculum : Meaning , Definition and Principles of curriculum construction
5.2 Organization of the contents :
• Logical and Psychological
• Spiral and Topical
5.3 Recommendations of NCF –2005, KCF -2009 and NCFTE -2010 with reference to Mathematics
Education.
5.4 Critical analyses of Karnataka state secondary school mathematics curriculum keeping In view of the
curriculum principles or standard format.

UNIT - 6 Resources for Strengthening Teaching Mathematics.


6.1 Printed Resources :
6.1.1 Text Book : Meaning ,Characteristics , Importance and analysis of
Text Book ( Vogel’s Spot check text book evaluation scale )
6.1.2 Work Book : Meaning , guidelines for preparing a Work Book ,
Advantages.
6.1.3 e- Resources : Internet , e-learning , Websites related to Mathematics Education , ICT Kit in
Mathematics
6.2 Visual resources : Charts , Pictures , Models , Television, L.C.D. , Black Board, Interactive Board.
Smart Board and Digital board.
6.3 Co-curricular Activities :
6.3.1 Mathematics Club : Meaning , Organization , Importance and activities
6.3.2 Mathematics Laboratory : Need and Importance , Equipping
Mathematics Laboratory.
6.4 Improvised Apparatus ; Meaning and Importance.

UNIT - 7 Evaluation in Mathematics :


7.1 Evaluation : Meaning , Purposes and Advantages , Qualities of a Good Test
7.2 Achievement test ; Meaning , Importance and construction of test
7.3 Unit Test in Mathematics : Meaning , Importance and format
7.4 Tests :
7.4.1 Essay Type Test , Short Answer Type Tests , Objective type test
7.4.2 Diagnostic Test and Remedial Teaching ; Meaning , Importance
7.5 Question Bank meaning and importance

UNIT – 8 Mathematics Teacher :


8 1 Teacher : Essential Qualities , Duties and Responsibilities
8.2 Professional growth : Seminars , Workshop, conference
8.3 Problems faced by mathematics teacher in rural and urban areas And
Measures to overcome them.
8.4 Continuous comprehensive evaluation ; Concepts, Objectives, Types & tools & Tequnique of CCE ,
Components of CCE in teaching mathematics

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit-5
• Seminar on NCF-05 and NCFTE-12
• Critical analyses of Karnataka state secondary school mathematics curriculum keeping In view of the
curriculum principles.
101 
 
Unit-6
• Review of text book on any topic using vogel’ s check list.
• Preparation of any one improvised apparatus

Unit -7
• Preparation of 25 multiple choice questions on any one topic
• Construct achievement test on any one topic.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

ASSINGMENTS : Yadavad S B (2010)


• Briefly explain about the meaning , scope , need and importance of Mathematics.
• Briefly discuss about the relationship of Mathematics with other school subjects and With other
branches of mathematics.
• Briefly analyse the contributions of any three famous mathematicians.
• Briefly explain the values of mathematics.
• Discuss Loren Anderson’s taxonomy of educational objectives.
• Explain the meaning , importance and steps of Lesson Planning.
• Explain the meaning , components, cycle and importance of Micro Teaching.
• Explain the meaning , steps , difference and importance of any one approaches or methods of
teaching mathematics.
• Briefly discuss about techniques of teaching mathematics.
• Briefly discuss about the constructivist approach in teaching methods.
• Critical analyses of Karnataka State Secondary School Mathematics Curriculum Keeping In view the
curriculum principal.
• Critical analyses of Karnataka State Secondary School Mathematics text book of 8th and 9ths Standard
by Vogel’s Spot check text book evaluation scale
• Explain in brief about mathematics club with respect to meaning, organization and activities.
• Explain in brief the different types of test. Analyse 8th or 9th std question paper of your method.
• Explained in brief the difficulties faced by the mathematics teacher in rural areas. Suggest measures
to overcome these difficulties.

REFERENCES :
• Mangal S.K. (1987) . Teaching of Mathematics , Ludhiana ; Tondan Publicatins
• Kuppuswamy Ayyangar N (1988). The Teaching of Mathematics in new education , Delhi ; Universal
Book and stationary Co
• Nanda N. N. (1972) . Teaching of Mathematics , Ludhiana ; Sharada Brothers
• Rai B .C ( 1978) . Teaching of Mathematics , Lucknow ; Prakasan Kendra
• Rawat M .S. (1982) . Ganit Shikshan , Agra ; Vinod Pusthak Mandir
• Sidhu Kulbirsingh ( 1996 ) . Teaching of Mathematics ( 4th Ed ) , New delhi ; Sterling Publishers Pvt
• Suxen R . C (1970 ) , Curriculum and Teaching of Mathematics in secondary School , New Delhi ;
NCERT
• Malhotra V (2006) . Methods of Teaching Mathematics , New Delhi ; Cresent Publishing corporation
• NCERT (2006) . National Curriculum Frame Work for school education - 2005. New Delhi
• Yadawad SB (2014) Methods of Teaching Mathematics Viyanidhi Gadag.

 
 
102 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester 2 
Course – EPC II: Drama and Arts in Education       48 Hours

Objectives: After completion of the course, student-teachers will be able to:-


1. Fulfill an individual’s potentials through fine art.
2. Create a whole experience of being fully present and working with all of ones’ faculties and being in
relationship with others and nature.
3. Help appreciate the interconnectedness of an individual’s physical, emotional health with that of social,
environmental health of the human and natural community.
4. Help connect these two with the inner aspects of one’s being and to appreciate and create beauty and
harmony within and outside. It operates from a paradigm that the aesthetic needs are fundamental to all
human beings and by creating opportunities to work on these, hone them, cultivate them; we can hope to
create harmonious individuals and a harmonious world.
5. Develop ability to appreciate the inherent rhythm, beauty and harmony in forms, relations, and character.
6. Critique the current trends in art education and develop a possible scenario for art for change.
7. Understand the range of traditional art forms in the light ofNational Integration.
8. Develop an appreciation for diverse music forms and the role of music in human cultures.
9. Create and present pieces of art: using visual arts and crafts
10. Create and present pieces of performance art using music and movement
11. Evolve collective art projects incorporating different art media – into a public festival/ event.
12. Deepen understanding, appreciation and skills in one chosen medium through self work and evaluate self
as an artist and art educator.
13. Enable student-teachers to use drama processes to examine their present knowledge.
14. To generate new knowledge, understanding and perceptions of the world.
15. To train, enhance some theatre skills that will later help them be creative and enlightened teachers.

Activities-I
1. Drama as a process that draws our physical, emotional, intellectual and other faculties together in a
moment (e.g. life itself) makes for worthwhile, far reaching, holistic learning. It is important to stress
that drama is not about the self alone or self-expression alone.
2. The process of drama is a social experience. It is about the richness of understanding that can be
generated by a group about society, self and the interconnections. The understanding generated within a
group is internalized and is carried forward by the individual in diverse personal and social contexts.
The focus of drama is on the student- building her/his creative capacities through theatre.
(These activities will be conducted in school in the presence and under guidance of teacher educator.)

Activities-II
1. Draw out and work with different faculties simultaneously i.e. physical, intuitive, emotional, sensual and
mental through practical exercises to build imagination and concentration of the body and mind of pupil
teachers.
2. Structured exercises for coordinating, enhancing and translating imagination into physical expression.
(Theatre techniques are used to help stretch, enhance and challenge the student-teacher in terms of her/his
body, imagination and perceptions.)
3. By participating in group drama explorations structured and guided by the teacher, the student-teachers
would enhance their critical awareness of the world and themselves in it. The focus is not the self alone
but the social world that the self-lives in.

Activities-III
1. Pupil teacher will learn to challenge and shift one’s own attitude and standpoint as one learns to
understand multiple perspectives to empathize by Teacher educator, then transfer their learning in school.

103 
 
2. Teacher educator will identify and develop the creative potential of Pupil Teacher through creative
dramas. (In drama exploration, the overall context presented to students is to understand life and to learn
from life. The mode is experiential. The exercises are structured by the teacher, but the experience and its
outcome is generated by participants in the process. The experience and reflection on that is the learning.
However for this to happen it is mandatory that the exercises are planned and structured by the teacher.
3. Encourage recognition of differences among people: caste, class, gender, religion, age, community,
occupation, lifestyle, etc. and how these influence actions, decisions, and relationships of people. Learn
to place oneself in a wider arena of these cross cutting currents. The self to be placed in the context of the
other. “How should I look at the others what does that reveal about me?” Go beyond the immediate and
look at other groups and settings, e.g. rural, the disadvantaged and other cultural communities, Ways of
seeing situations, social structures and communities.
4. To sharpen observation and to learn to continuously ask probing questions while investigating situations.

Activities-IV
1. Pupil Teacher will learn to identify areas that are best suited for drama exploration, planning and
organization of drama.
2. Any theme of drama will choose by pupil teacher with discussion or involvement of students such as girl
feticide, women education, child abasement etc., and plan and organize the drama.
3. Examine through chosen themes, how learning can take place in the classroom through group drama
exploration by a whole class of secondary school students. By these activities pupil teachers will examine
(with the help of teacher educator) to develop the capacity to look at some situations from different
perspectives, Learning to recognize contradictions within situations with the aim of grasping a better
understanding of the situations rather than wanting to look for solutions.
4. Finding connections between the particular and the universal. And how larger processes and contexts
play out in the specific context of daily life situations and vice versa. For instance, the case of a
marginalized dalit woman seeking medical help is connected with the larger world of state responsibility
and public health policy, prevailing gender relations, the judiciary, etc.
5. Change as a principle of life. Identifying it within drama work; the repercussions of change, who does it
affect, why and how? Learning to continuously reflect on and analyse classroom exploration and their
connection with events and situations in world outside. Evaluating one’s own and group progress in
class.

Activities-V
1. Teacher educator will illustrate Fine Arts component as to understand interconnections between arts,
crafts, drama, culture, aesthetics, health and livelihoods. The aim is also to appreciate and engage with a
diverse range of art processes, products and performances – folk and classical through exposure and
exchange. It is believed that giving opportunities to school teachers to engage with aesthetics through art
forms is likely to cultivate and hone their aesthetic sense and their ability to recognise beauty and
harmony as essential aspects of a life of quality.
2. For Art, Art appreciation and Art education: Visit places like crafts museums, bal-bhavan, art galleries.
Organise art, craft and music exercises with small groups followed by discussions and presentation.
3. Any local exhibition or art event can be used as precursor for the session. The session should involve
using some art for a while followed by a reflection on the experience and then connect it to their own
school days and art.
4. Visual Art: Opportunities to experiment and create pieces of art using different medium. Focus on
colours, textures, composition and thematic content. Using a range of medium: paper and water colors,
paper and crayon, color pencils, acrylic, oil paint and canvass, student-teachers would learn about lines,
forms, compositions, colors, space divisions etc. Specific tasks would include free drawing, developing
narratives in visuals, composition of an imagined situation, telling a story through comic strips, creating a
collage using images, bits cut out from old magazines, newspaper etc.
Note: - Pupil Teacher will draft a report on entire activities.

104 
 
            KARNATAK UNIVERSITY, DHARWAD                       No: XXXXXX 
KARNATAKA, INDIA – 580 003 
STATEMENT OF MARKS EXAMINATION OF DEC  – 2016/JAN 2017 
    BACHELOR OF EDUCATION ‐ II SEMESTER    (CBCS) 
MODEL 
NAME :                                                                                                                                                                                                                           SEAT NO : XXXXXXXX
FATHER NAME :                                                                                                                                                                                       MOTHER NAME :
NAME OF THE COLLEGE : 
SUBJEC CODES  SUBJECT NAME THEORY/PRACTICAL IA  TOTAL CREDIT  SEM  CREDIT  GRADE 
1  2  MAX MIN OBT MAX OBT  MAX MIN OBT HRS  GRADE  POINTS  14 
3  4  5  6  7  8  9  10  11  POINTS  13   
12 
       
S2 COURSE  7  LEARNING AND TEACHING  80  32  20    100  40  4     
S2 COURSE  8  KNOWLEDGE AND CURRICULUM‐I  80  32  20  100  40  4   
S2 COURSE  9  ASSESSMENT FOR LEARNING  80  32  20  100  40  4   
S2 COURSE  10  EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY  80  32  20  100  40  4   
S2 COURSE  11  PADAGOGY OF SCHOOL SUBJECT‐I  (POSS‐I)  80  32  20  100  40  4   
S2 COURSE  12  PADAGOGY OF SCHOOL SUBJECT‐II (POSS‐II)  80  32  20  100  40  4   
S2 EPC‐II  DRAMA AND ART IN EDUCATION  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  A/B/C/D/E 
S2 PRATICUM‐I  PRACTICUM ON POSS‐I  ‐‐  ‐‐  50  50  ‐‐  2   
S2 PRATICUM‐II  PRACTICUM ON POSS‐II  ‐‐  ‐‐  50  50  ‐‐  2   
S2 CCC‐I  CONTENT COMPONENT COURSE‐I  50  20  ‐‐  50  20  2   
S2 CCC‐II  CONTENT COMPONENT COURSE‐II  50  20  ‐‐  50  20  2   
S2 EWF‐1   COMMUNITY LIVING CAMP/CITIZENSHIP CAMP  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  A/B/C/D/E 
   
Total                                                                                                                                                                                    700       240                     28        

In Words   
Semester GPA :                                                            Result                                                Grade   

Note: Column No.12= (Column 10)/10,               Column 11= Total credit hours for each subject.    Column No.13= (Column 12)* (Column 11) 
G.P.A= Total value of Column 13/ Total value of column 11 
E.W.F= Engagement With Field  
E.P.C= Enhancing Professional Capacity. 
PLACE : 
DATE :                                                                                                                        REGISTRAR (EVALUATION)

105 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Semester 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
106 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –III  
Course ­13: Gender, School and Society        48 Hours
Objectives: After completion of the course, student­teachers will be able to: 
1. Develop basic understanding and familiarity with key concepts–gender, gender bias, gender stereotype,
empowerment, gender parity, equity and equality, patriarchy and feminism.
2. Understand the gradual paradigm shift from women's studies to gender studies and some important
landmarks in connection with gender and education in the historical and contemporary period.
3. Learn about gender issues in school, curriculum and textual materials across disciplines, pedagogical
processes and its intersection with class, caste, religion and region.
4. Understand how gender, power and sexuality are related to education (in terms of access, curriculum and
pedagogy).
5. Develop an understanding of the paradigm shift from women studies to gender studies, based on the
historical backdrop.
6. Student to construct critically the impact of policies,programmes and scheme for promotion of gender
equality and empowerment.
7. Apply the conceptual tools learnt regarding gender and sexuality to understand issues related to Sexual
Harassment at the workplace and Child Sexual Abuse.
8. Develop an understanding of different theories on gender and education and relate it to power relations.
The institutions involved in socialisation processes would be analysed to see how socialisation practices
impact power relations and identity formation.
9. Understand how gender relates to education and schooling. The students will be able to understand on
how school as an institution addresses gender concerns in curriculum, textual materials and pedagogy. It
will enable the student to draw linkages between life skills and sexuality. 
 

Unit 1: Gender Issues: Key Concepts


1. Concepts and terms and relate them with their context in understanding the power relations to Gender,
sex, sexuality, patriarchy, masculinity and feminism
2. Gender bias, gender stereotyping, and empowerment
3. Equity and equality in relation with caste, class, religion, ethnicity, disability and region.

Unit 2: Gender Studies: Paradigm Shifts


1. Paradigm shift from women's studies to gender studies.
2. Historical backdrop: Some landmarks from social reform movements of the nineteenth and twentieth
centuries with focus on women's experiences of education.
3. Contemporary period: Recommendations of policy initiatives, commissions and committees, schemes,
programmes and plans.

Unit 3: Gender, Power and Education


1. Theories on Gender and Education: Application in the Indian Context:
• Socialisation theory
• Gender difference
• Structural theory
• Deconstructive theory
2. Gender Identities and Socialisation Practices in:
• Family
• Schools
• Other formal and informal organisation.
3. Schooling of Girls:
• Inequalities and resistances (issues of access, retention and exclusion).

Unit 4: Gender Issues in Curriculum


1. Gender, culture and institution: Intersection of class, caste, religion and region
2. Curriculum and the gender question

107 
 
3. Construction of gender in curriculum framework since Independence: An Analyse
4. Gender and the hidden curriculum
5. Gender in text and context (textbooks' inter-sectionality with other disciplines, classroom processes,
including pedagogy)
6. Teacher as an agent of change
7. Life skills and sexuality.
Unit 5: Gender, Sexuality, Sexual Harassment and Abuse
1. Linkages and differences between reproductive rights and sexual rights.
2. Development of sexuality, including primary influences in the lives of children (such as gender, body
image, role models).
3. Sites of conflict: Social and emotional.
4. Understanding the importance of addressing sexual harassment in family, neighborhood and other formal
and informal institutions.
5. Agencies perpetuating violence: Family, school, work place and media (print and electronic).
6. Institutions redressing sexual harassment and abuse. Suggested Practicum.
Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:
Unit – 1 : Practicum/Field Work
• Analyse of textual materials from the perspective of gender bias and stereotype.
• Organising debates on equity and equality cutting across gender, class, caste, religion, ethnicity,
disability, and region etc.
Unit-2 :Practicum/Field Work
• Preparation of project on critical Analyse of recommendations of commissions and policies on
capacity building and empowerment of girls and women, how these initiatives have generated
in the formation of women collectively and have helped in encouraging grassrootsmobilisation
of women, such as MahilaSamakhyaprogrammes.
• Plan and organize a play on the development of women education from nineteenth to twentieth
century.
• Find out the concept of women empowerment in ancient Indian culture and analyse its
relevance at present scenario.
Unit – 3 : Practicum/Field Work
• Collection of folklores reflecting socialisation processes and drafts a report on entire programme.
• Debate and discussion on rights of girls and women.
• Field visits to schools, to observe the schooling process from a gender perspective. Preparation of
indicators on participation of boys and girls in heterogeneous schools–public and private,-aided and
managed by religious organizations and prepare a report.
Unit – 4 :Practicum/Field Work
• Debate on women role models in various fields with emphasis on women in unconventional
roles.
• Prepare tools to analyse reflection of gender in curriculum and draft a report after
administration of scoring and prepare a report. Report will be presented in seminar.
Unit – 5 :Practicum/Field Work
• Case study on how students perceive sexuality and their own body images. It would also focus
on how gender identities are formed.
• Case study on how students perceive role models in their own lives. Debate must be conducted
in school among adolescence.
• Prepare an analytical report on portrayal of women in print and electronic media.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

108 
 
References
1. Delpit, L.D. (2012) Multiplication is for white people: raising expectations for other people’s children,
the new press.
2. Deng, Z (2013) School subjects and academic disciplines. In A. Luke, A .Woods,&Wer (Eds.),
Curriculum syllabus design and equity: A primer and model. Routledge.
3. GOI.(1966). Report of the education commission: Education and national development. New Delhi:
ministry of education.
4. GOI (1986). National policy of education . GOI.
5. GOI. (1992, 1998), National policy on education, 1986 (As modified in 1992). Retrieved from
http://mhrd.gov.in/sites/upload_files/mhrd/files/NPE86-mod92.pdf
6. Menon, N.(2012)seeing like a feminist. India: Penguin.
7. Nirantar. (2010) textbook regimes: A feminist critique of nation and identity. New delhi
8. A. banon. Robent (2010) social psychology,pearson education New Delhi
9. Goswami. Acharyabalchand,(2003), vyaktiprivar and sex jaina publication jaipur.
10. Mathursavitri (2008), sociological foundation of education, kavitaprakashan,jaipur.
11. Sidhuramindra, (2009), sociology of education, shrisaiprintographers, New Delhi
12. Mudgal S.D. (2007), social work education today and tomorrow, book enclave, jaipur
13. Nathpramanikrathindra, (2006), gender Lhequality and women’s empowerment,abhijeet publication
Delhi
14. Malik, C.D,(2008) social and political thought Dr. B.R. amSSkar,arise publishers and distriba, New
Delhi
15. Naik, S.C.(2005) society and environment, oxford & 1B publishing co.Pvt.ltd.New Delhi
16. Runelasatypal,(2009), sociogy of the Indian education, rajadthanhindigranthakadmi, jaipur
17. www.teachernetwork.org/tnli/accomplishment
18. www.gender.com.ac.uk
19. www.genderstuddies.org.
20. www.genderparddigm.com/publiscation/html.
21. www.sparknotes.com/sociology/socialization/section4/rhtml.
22. www.unicef/org/sower96/ngirls.html.
23. www.jaipurrugs.org./about/our-story.

109 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –III  
Course­14: Creating an Inclusive School       48 Hours
 
Objectives:After completion of the course, student-teachers will be able to:
1. Understand concept, meaning and significance of inclusive education
2. Bring about an understanding of the culture, policies and practices that need to be addressed in order
to create an inclusive school.
3. Appreciate the need for promoting inclusive practice and the roles and responsibilities of the
teachers.
4. Develop critical understanding of the recommendations of various commissions and committees
towards teacher preparation for inclusive education; understand the nature of difficulties encountered
by children.
5. Prepare teachers for inclusive schools.
6. Analyze special education, integrated education, mainstream and inclusive education practices.
7. Identify and utilize existing resources for promoting inclusive practice.
8. Develop a positive attitude and sense of commitment towards actualizing the right to
education of all learners.
9. Prepare a conductive teaching learning environment in varied school settings.
10. Develop the ability to conduct and supervise action research activities.

Unit I: Introduction, Issues & perspectives of Inclusive Education


1. Definitions, concept and importance of inclusion and disability.
2. Historical perspectives of inclusive education for children with diverse needs.
3. Difference between special education, integrated education and inclusive education.
4. Advantages of inclusive education for education for all children in the context of right to education.
5. N.C.F 2005 and adaptation of teaching learning material.

Unit-II: Policy Perspective


1. Recommendations of the Indian Education Commission (1964-66).
2. Scheme of Integrated Education for Disabled Children
3. National Policy on Education (NPE, 1986-92).
4. National Curriculum Framework, 2005 NCERT
5. The Convention on the Rights of the Child (specific articles related to inclusive education).
6. The World Declaration on the Survival, Protection and Development of Children and the Plans of
action (Outcome of the UNICEF World Summit for Children, (1990) Promoting Inclusion Preventing
Exclusion.
7. UNESCO Conventions, declaration and recommendations related to Rights of persons with
Disabilities.

UNIT-III: Diversity in the classroom


1. Diversity- Meaning and definition.
2. Disability – psychological construction of disability identity, discrimination.
3. Models of disabilities & Barriers to learning and participation.
4. Concept, Nature, and Characteristics of Multiple Disabilities, classroom management for inclusive
education
5. MDGs ( Millennium development Goals) and EPA goal of UNESCO

UNIT IV: Curriculum, Pedagogy and assessment in Inclusive School


1. Inclusive curriculum- Meaning and characteristics.
2. Teaching and learning environment with special reference to inclusive school
3. Guidelines for adaptation for teaching/ practicing science, mathematics, social studies , languages,
physical education, yoga, heritage, arts, theatre, drama etc in inclusive settings.
110 
 
4. Utilization of records/ case profiles for identification, assessment and intervention for inclusive
classrooms.
5. Techniques and methods used for adaptation of content, laboratory skills and play material in
inclusive classroom.

Unit-V: Teacher Preparation and Inclusive Education


1. Review existing educational programmes offered in secondary school (general and special education).
2. Skills and competencies of teachers and teacher educators for secondary education in inclusive
settings.
3. N.C.F 2005 and curriculum for teacher preparation and transaction modes.
4. Roles, responsibilities and professional ethics of an inclusive education teacher and teacher educators.
5. Evaluation and follow-up programmes for improvement of teacher preparation programmes in
inclusive education.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials:


Unit – 1 :Practicum/Field Work
• Observe inclusive teaching strategies in an inclusive classroom and discuss with teacher for further
planning.
• To investigate the opinion of primary teachers on the integration of students with disability in normal
schools.

Unit – 2 :Practicum/Field Work


• To study the conceptions of teachers about the need of inclusive education in primary schools, then
Method: collect views of teachers and heads of school
• Analyse and interpret results in the light of inclusive education and write a report.
• Workshop/ presentations on child right:
• Explain the main constitutional provisions on inclusive education.

Unit – 3 :Practicum/Field Work


• Problem: to study the educational resources for persons with disability (POD) in local secondary
schools, two primary schools of your choice, result may be discussed in school in the present context of
teacher education.
• Conduct an awareness program on millennium goal of UNESCO.
• Conduct a survey in the local area to ascertain the prevailing attitudes / practices toward social, emotional
and academic inclusion of children with diverse needs.
• Conduct a survey on the type of supportive service needed for inclusion of children with any disability
and share the findings in the class.

Unit – 4 :Practicum/Field Work


• Planning and conducting multi-level teaching in the persons with disabilities (two Classes).
• To study the barriers/problems in relation to development of positive policy regarding inclusive teaching-
learning practices in local private schools/schools in slums/rural areas, method may be: collection of the
views of managing committees/heads/teachers on development of positive policy regarding inclusive
teachers-learning facilities.
• Write a report on entire activity and present it in classroom presentation.(among peer group)

Unit – 5 :Practicum/Field Work


• Discussion, group work and presentation by students on uses of internet in inclusive setting:
• Prepare an action plan for implementation of policies of inclusive education in school setting.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks
111 
 
References
1. Maitra,Krishna(2008):INCLUSION ISSUES AND PERSPECTIVES (For Teachers,Teachers’ Educators
and Parents): Kanishka Publishers, Distributors New Delhi-110002
2. Ahuja. A, Jangira, N.K. (2002): Effective Teacher Training; Cooperative Learning Based Approach:
National Publishing house 23 Daryaganj, New Delhi 110002.
3. Jangira N.K. and Mani, M.N.G. (1990): Integrated Education for Visually Handicapped, Gurgaon, Old
Subjimandi, Academic Press.
4. Jha. M.( 2002) Inclusive Education for All: Schools Without Walls, Heinemann Educational publishers,
Multivista Global Ltd, Chennai, 600042, India.
5. Sharma, P.L. (1990) Teachers handbook on IED-Helping children with special needs N. C. E R T
Publication.
6. Sharma P.L (2003) Planning Inclusive Education in Small Schools, R .I E. Mysore
7. Agnihotri, R.K. (1995). Multilingualism as a classroom resource. In K. Heugh, A Siegruhn, & P.
Pluddemann (Eds.) Multilingual education for South Africa 9pp. 3-&). Heinemann Educational Books.
8. T., Ainswcow, M., Black-Hawkins, K., Vaughan, M., & Shaw, L. (2000). Index for inclusion: Developing
learning and participation in schools. Centre for Studies on Inclusive Education.
9. Carini, P.F. (2001). Valuing the immeasurable. In starting strong: A different look at children, schools,
and standards (pp. 165-181). New York: Teachers College Press.
10. Delpit, L.D. (2012) Multiplication is for white people: raising experctations for other people’s children,
the new press.
11. GOI.(1966). Report of the education commission: Education and national development. New Delhi:
ministry of education.
12. GOI (1986). National policy of education. GOI.
13. GOI.(1992 , 1998), National policy on education, 1986 (As modified in 1992). Retrieved from
http://mhrd.gov.in/sites/upload_files/mhrd/files/NPE86-mod92.pdf
14. Govinda R. (2011). Who goes to school? Exploring exclusion in Indian education. Oxford University
Press.
15. Parekh, B.C. (2000). Rethinking multiculturalism: Cultural diversity and political theory (pp 213-230)
Palgrave.
16. UNESCO. (1989) UN convention on the rishts of the child. UNESCO.
17. UNESCO. (2006). United Nations convention on the rights of persons with disabilities.
UNESCO. (2009) Policy guidelines on inclusion in education UNESCO
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
112 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –III  
COURSE­15:Critical Understanding of ICT 
48 Hours

Objectives: On completion of the course, the student teacher will be able to:
1. Understand Computer, Computer System and Operating System.
2. Become aware of On-line services of Computers.
3. Understand how Computers can be used across the School Curriculum.
4. Acquire knowledge of recent and future trends in using a Computer in Classroom.

Unit 1 : Fundamentals of Computer


1.1 Concept of IT – Meaning of IT, Information Processing, Applications of IT in different areas.
1.2 Meaning and definition, History and generations of Computers.
1.3 Types of Computers : Micro, Mini, Mainframe and Super Computers.
1.4 Capabilities and Limitations of Computer.
1.5 Basic structure of Computer – Input, CPU, Memory unit, Output unit, block diagram of computer.

Unit 2 : Computer System – Hardware and Software


2.1 Input devices – Keyboard and Mouse.
2.2 Output devices – Monitor and Printer.
2.3 Memory devices – Primary devices : RAM, ROM, Prom, E prom Ee prom. Secondary device - Hard
disk, Compact disk, pen drive.
2.4 Peripherals – Mike, Speakers, Modem, Scanners, Camera.
2.5 Computer Language and Classification of Software, Kannada softwares,

Unit 3 : Application Programs and Internet Resources


3.1 Word Processor – MS – word, Concept, basic elements.
3.2 Spread Sheets – MS – Excel, Concept, basic elements.
3.3 Presentation – MS – Power Point, Concept, basic elements.
3.4 Multimedia : meaning component, uses of multimedia in education
3.5 Internet resources – OFF line and ON line. – Meaning and uses of internet, Equipment needed, ISP. Web
browsing, surfing, search engines. E-mail and its usage.

Unit 4 : Computers in Education


4.1 Computer Assisted Learning (CAL).
4.2 Modes of CAL – Drill and practice, tutorials, simulation, computational and games.
4.3 Merits and limitations of CAL.
4.4 Application of Computers in different walks of life.
4.5 Recent/future trends in using computers in Education.
i. On line instruction.
ii. Smart Classroom.
iii. Educational pod casting services.
iv. Instructions through holography.

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials :


Unit 1 :
• History and Generation of Computers.
• Data and information.
• Configuration of computers.
• Draw the block diagram of computer and label the parts .

Unit 2 :
• Input devices – Keyboard and Mouse.
• Output devices – Monitor and Printer.
113 
 
• Memory devices - RAM, ROM, Hard disk and external hard disk, Compact disk, pen drive, Blue Ray
disk.
• Peripherals – Mike, Speakers, Modem, Scanners, Camera.

Unit 3:
• Creation of a Word Document.
• Computation of measures of central tendency using MS – Excel.
• Graphical representation of data.
• Creation and presentation of slides.
• Sorting and filtering of Data
• ISP, WWW and search engines, downloading.
• Misuse of Internet and Cyber crimes.
• Legal and copyright issues regarding downloading materials from Internet.

Unit 4 :
• Modes of CAL.
• Prepare the CAL material
• Applications of Computers in different walks of life.
• Visit and use of smart class room

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

References :
1. Prof. Lalini Varanasi (2007), Computer Education. Neel Kamal Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
2. Dr. Rajashekar S. (2010), Computer Education. Neel Kamal Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
3. Dr. B.N. Kongawada and Kavitha (2006), Computer Education. vidyanidhi Prakashan, Gadag.
4. Jogindeer Singh and Kulwanth Singh – Computer Education. Tandon Publications, Ludhiyana.
5. Dr. Chandrashekar and Rudramuni (2008), Computer Education. Lakshmi Publications, Chitradurga.
6. Anil Madan (1999) Illustrated world of Computers. Dreamland Publications, New Delhi.
7. Utpal Mallik (2002) ‘Learning with Computers’ (Level – I), NCERT, New Delhi.
8. Utpal Mallik (2003) ‘Learning with Computers’ (Level – II), NCERT, New Delhi.
9. Utpal Mallik and others (2002) ‘Learning with Computers’ (Level – III), NCERT, New Delhi.
10. Rush by N.J. (1979), An Introduction to Educational Computing. Coom Helm, London.
11. Subramanian N. (1998), Introduction to Computers. Tata MC Graw – Hill Pub Company Ltd. New
Delhi.
12. Jain V.K. – Computer for Beginners. Pustak Mahal, New Delhi.
13. Rajaraman V. (1998), Fundamentals of Computers. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
14. Bansal S.K. (2002), Fundamentals of Information Technology. New Delhi : AHP Publishing
Corporation.
15. Teacher’s Training – Mahiti Sidhu, DSERT, Govt of Karnataka, Bangalore 2004.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
114 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –III  
Course­ 16: Knowledge and Curriculum – II                  48 Hours
Objectives:After completion of the course, student-teachers will be able to:
1. Understand the epistemological, sociological and the psychological basis of curriculum development.
2. Understand the different types of curriculum with respect to their main orientation and approaches.
3. Compare and analyze the NCF over the years with respect to their foundation
4. Considerations, concerns, priorities and goals.
5. Understand linkage among curriculum framework and critical issues. Which directly and indirectly
are related with learning.
6. Analyse curriculum framework, in the light of learners’ need, and understanding in the light
ofcharacteristics.

Unit I-Introduction to Curriculum-


1. Meaning of curriculum, four perspectives of curriculum – Traditionalist, Conceptual – Empiricist, Re-
conceptualists, Social Constructivists.
2. Concept of core curriculum, Hidden curriculum, spiral curriculum, in legal led curriculum and their
relevance.
3. Analyse the influence of school, community and state on the content and curriculum of primary to
secondary (Any one level) and draft a report of work.

Unit-ll:Curriculum framework & learner


1. Curriculum framework: -meaning, concept, need and importance; ramification of curriculum
framework into curriculum, syllabus and text books.
2. Nature of learner and learning process: developmental characteristics of learners: developmental
tasks; behavioristic, cognitivist and social learning (and their relevance to curriculum development.)
learning approaches.

Unit III – Basis of curriculum-


1. Epistemological basis of curriculum: Epistemology: Meaning, concept-and forms of
knowledge, structure of a discipline, characteristics of disciplines and levels of
understanding.
2. Sociological basis societal needs and aspirations, culture and values, social changes,
knowledge explosion /national concerns and goals, global –
3. Globalization localization and privatization, political ideology and technological inferences,
economic necessities in reference to curriculum.
4. (Cultural context of students: - multicultural, multilingual aspects/ critical issues:
Environmental concerns, gender differences, inclusiveness, value concerns and issues, social
sensitivity.)

Unit IV- Curriculum & Society


1. Curriculum: meaning, concept purpose characteristics and types:
2. Subject- centered; learner- centered; community centered; Environmental centered; humanistic
curriculum:
3. Social Reconstructionist curriculum meaning, concept characteristics & purpose, role of teacher.

Unit V-Features ofcurriculum framework


1. The salient features of national curriculum framework 2005 and NCFTE 2010 Analyse of these
documents with respect to various aspects of foundations, concerns and the changes made with
important considerations.
2. Nuffield, BACS, PSCS, NSES with respect to their priorities, concerns nail goals towards school
education.

115 
 
Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials :

Unit – 1 :Practicum/Field Work


• Organize a workshop related to curriculum development.
• Analyse the influence of school, community and state on the content and curriculum of primary to
secondary (Any one level)
• On the basis of any textbooks (VI to XII), prepare a list of topics and activities given on: (i)
Language and gender (ii) Language and peace and write a report on their reflection in the
textbooks.

Unit – 2 :Practicum/Field Work


1. Organize a workshop related to curriculum Structure/framework.
2. Case study on school students to understand Nature of learner and learning process.
3. Critically evaluate or assess the text book of secondary level of your subject.

Unit – 3 :Practicum/Field Work


1. Play a drama on good discipline in school.
2. Content Analyse of any subject school level book in the light ofgender issues/values.
3. Organize tree plantation program with the involvement of community menbers and school.
4. Organize awareness campaign for cleanliness in nearby school and at home.

Unit – 4 :Practicum/Field Work


1. To organize street theatre/play on environment awareness.
2. Organize a seminar on type of Curriculum.

Unit – 5 : Practicum/Field Work


1. Comparative Analyse of curriculum of school at any one level in the light ofNCF 2005.
2. Prepare Project on NCF2005.
3. Organize an orientation program for school teachers on NCF2005 and NCFTE 2010.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

Reference
1. Schilvest, W.H. (2012), curriculum: prospective paradigm and possiilty.M.C. MLLAN publication.
2. Hirst, Paul, H. Knowledge and the curriculum. Routledge publication.
3. Letha rammohan (2009). Curriculum instrchon and evaluation. Agerwal publication, Agra.
4. Scolt, dand (2003). Curriculum studies: curriculum knowledge. Routledgefalmes, m.y.
5. Kelly, AV. (2009). The curriculum: theory and practice sage publication Singapore. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
116 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –I  
Course ­17 :Contemporary India and Education    48 Hours
Objectives: After completion of the course, student-teachers will be able to:-
1. evolve a deeper understanding of its purpose and its relationship with society and Humanity.
2. contextualize contemporary India and education.
3. understand the classroom as a social context.
4. provide a setting for interaction, generation of dialogue and the opportunity to appreciate
diverse perspectives of issues.
5. criticallyanalyse human and child rights.
6. equips the teacher with proactive perspective and sense of agency.
7. engage with concepts which are drawn from a diverse set of disciplines.
8. learn about policy debates overtime the implementation of policies and actual shaping of
qschool education.
UNIT – I:Diversity in Society & Education:
• Education: Meaning, concept and Nature.
• Social & Cultural diversity: Meaning, concept and their impact on Education.
• Social, Cultural, Economic and Political perspective of society and Education.
• Meaning & Concept of diverse set of disciplines (with special reference to sociology,history,
philosophy, political science), and economics.
• The role of educational institution for creating new social orders.

UNIT – II:Issues of contemporary Indian society & Constitutional Provision:


• Meaning & concept of: Pluralistic culture, identity, gender equality, poverty and Gender
sensitization and their relation with education
• Concept of inequality, discrimination, marginalization (Govinda, 2011) and their impact on
education and society(the PROBE team,1999)
• Preamble, Fundamental rights & duties of citizens & directive principles of state policies.
• Constitutional provisions on human & child right, and values.
• Role of NCPCR (National Commission on Protection of Child Right)
• National Integration and National Security

UNIT – III School as a Social Context:


• Social order: Meaning, Concept and its impact on school
• Role of Education in sustaining a democratic social order.
• Role of education in developing Socialistic patterns.
• Rights for gender equality and their implication for social change.
• School cultures & issues of society.
• Class room as a social context: Pedagogical and curricular shift of 1990s to at present ,mid-day meal
programme and role of legislative action by order of Supreme Court.

UNIT – IV Emerging Indian Concerns and their Educational Implications:


• Meaning, Concept and impact on Education of Liberalization, Globalization, Privatization.
• Stratification of Education: concept and process.
• Education for marginalized group like women, dalits and tribal people(Chakravarti 1998)

UNIT – V Contemporary Issues and Policies


• Contemporary issues related policies in the pre-independence period
• Right to Education (GOI 2009, Raina 2010), SSA, Policies for UEE, NayeeTaleem
• Kothari commission recommendations and their implementation in the context of planned
Industrialization & Education.

117 
 
• National Policy on Education 1986, its review 1992 (context of Liberalization and Globalization of
Indian Economic)

Suggested list of topics/questions/activities to organise tutorials :


Unit – 1 :Practicum/Field Work
• Project on tracing the process by which a consumer product is made available from its raw form to a
finished product and studying the various factors of geography, economics, politics, history and
sociology that may have influenced it in one way or another.
• Match people’s experiences about their and others’ culture and diversity.

Unit – 2 : Practicum/Field Work


• Prepare a report after studying the major characteristics of India’s pluralistic society, which select in or
out school.
• To organize stage show or play to demonstrate cultural diversity of India / Rajasthan/ regional.
• Observe mid-day meal of a school to assess its nutritive value and social integral value (when children
from various socio-cultural background religion, caste etc.come together)
• Conduct an awareness programme on Child Rights with students, parents and community.

Unit – 3 :Practicum/Field Work


• Draft a report with the help of field interview while studying the issue of reservation as an equalitarian
policy.
• Write a survey based report on financial allocations/field conditions/policies/ imperatives of schools.

Unit -4 :Practicum/Field Work


• Conduct a special camp for children or women of tribal/nomad/illiterate/remote area to make them
literate or skilful or/to provide knowledge about hygiene.
• Draft a report on above special camp and present it in classroom seminar.

Unit -5 : Practicum/Field Work


• Examine policy & constitutional provision on equality and right to education.
• Make a repot after critical study of any earlier policies (NayeeTaleem or universal elementary education)
to integrate life, work and education the context of community participation and development.
• Train students in any five handicrafts on the basis of the Nayeetaleem.and other related to cottage
industries.
• Organize an exhibition on handicraft material.
 
 
Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks
 

118 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –III 
Course ­18 : Optional Course 
Health & Physical Education            48 Hours
• As  Physical  Education  is  made  compulsory  in  Primary  and  Secondary  education  by  Government  of 
Karnataka.  
• To  make  student  teachers  physically  fit,  mentally  healthy,  and  emotionally  balanced  some  physical 
activities should be made compulsory throughout the B.Ed. course.  
• So following activities should be conducted regularly. So that they can become model teachers.  
 

Activities :  

• Student teachers should participate in physical exercise and yoga (compulsory) every day.  
• They should participate in one outdoor game and in one indoor game. 
• They have the knowledge of ground measurement, marking and officiating skills in any two games.  
 

Objectives:  Upon completion of the course the student teacher will be able to,
1. Understand the significance of Health Education for the all round development.
2. Maintain and promote good health.
3. Develop the understanding of Physical Education and its related fields.
4. Know about the effective organization of physical education activities.

Unit I : Health and Health Education :


1.1: Meaning of health.
1.2: Importance of health.
1.3: Meaning of health education.
1.4: Aims, objectives and scope of health education.

Unit 2 : Health Service and Supervision :


2.1: Personal care – skin, eyes and teeth.
2.2: Safety Education – Meaning and significance, safety measures in Schools, Play-fields, Roads and
Homes.
2.3: First Aid - Meaning, Significance, Principle of giving first aid.
2.4: Fatigue - Meaning, Causes and Remedies.
2.5: Balanced Diet – Meaning and Benefits.

Unit 3 : Physical Education and its Related Fields :


3.1: Meaning
3.2: Aims, Objectives and Scope.
3.3: Related fields – Health, Education.
3.4: Recreation, Meaning & importance.
3.5: National integration – through sports and physical education.
3.6: Yoga - Meaning, Astanga yoga, significance in modern society.

Unit 4 : Leadership, Discipline, Incentives & Awards :


4.1: Leadership
4.1.1: Meaning and qualities of good leader in physical education.
4.1.2: Teacher leadership.
4.1.3: Students leadership.
4.2: Discipline
4.2.1: Meaning
119 
 
4.2.2: Common forms of indiscipline in schools.
4.2.3: Causes for indiscipline.
4.2.4: Steps to check indiscipline.
4.2.5: Rewards & discipline.
4.3: Incentives and Awards
4.3.1: Significance of Incentives & Awards
4.3.2: Types of Incentives & Awards

Unit 5 : Organization of Physical Education Activities


5.1: Internal and External Competition
5.1.1: Meaning
5.1.2: Organization
5.1.3: Benefits.
5.2: Tournaments :
5.2.1: Meaning
5.2.2: Types – single knock our and league
5.2.3: Benefits
5.3: Camps, Hike/Picnic
5.3.1: Meaning
5.3.2: Organization
5.3.3: Benefits

Practicum:
1. Participation in Athletics and in any one major game
(Indoor /Outdoor)
2. Ground marking for selected games and sports
3. Commands, line formation and ceremonial parade.
4. Participation in two National festival programmes for flag hoisting.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

References:
Kamalesh and Sangral, (2000), Principles and History of Physical Education, Ludhiyana : Tandon Publication.
Nadgir, K.G. (1998), Sharir Shikshanad Vidhanagalu, Dharwad : Mallesajjan
Vyayama Shale.
Nadgir, K.G (1997), Arogya Mattu Arogya Shikshana, Dharwad : Mallasajjana
Vyayama Shale.
Prakash Brothers (2000), Organization, Administration and Recreation in Physical Education, Ludhiana : Prakash
Brother Publication.
Rao, V.K. (2003), Physical Education, New Delhi : A.P.H. publishing Corporation.
Sarojkant Bihari and Prasanna Kumar Chowdhary (2003), Health and Physical Education, Ludhiana : Kalyeni
Publishers.
Vijendra Kumar (2000), Modern Methods of Teaching Physical Education, New Delhi : Sarup & Sons. 
 

120 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –III 
Course ­18 : Optional Course 
Value Education              48 Hours

Objectives: Upon completion of the course the student-teacher will be able to 48 Hours
1. understand the concept and type of values.
2. understand the meaning and basic – theories of axiology.
3. get an insight into the strategies of inculcation of values among children.
4. develop awareness about the different agencies working in the sphere of value education.
5. develop skills and techniques needed to teach value education.
6. understand the role of the teacher in value education.

Unit I : Introduction to Values


1.1 Values: Concept, Nature, Types and Significance.
1.2 Classification of Values – Intrinsic Values, Instrumental (Extrinic) Values, Moral
Values, Aesthetic Values, Economic Values, Social Values.
1.3 Classical and Contemporary Values in Indian Context
1.3.1 Classical Values of India
1.3.2 Purushartha Theory of Values
1.3.3 Panchakosha Theory of Values
1.3.4 Basic Human Values-Truth, Beauty, Goodness, Love, Peace, Non-Violence.
1.3.5 Contemporary Values-Scientific Temper,-Intellectual Honesty, Social Service and
Protection of Environment.

Unit 2 : Philosophical Bases of Value Education


2.1 Axiology – Meaning and Origin
2.2 Basic Theories of Axiology
2.2.1 Theory of Interest
2.2.2 Pragmatic Theory
2.3 Branches of Axiology – Ethics(Meta-Ethics and Normative Ethics) and Aesthetics)
2.4 Educational Implications of Axiology.

Unit 3 : Strategies of Inculcation of Values


3.1 Sources of Value Education – Autobiography and Biography of Great people,
Parables, Vedas, Bhagavadgita, Shlokas, Poems, Newspaper Clippings, Episodes from
Real Life, Documents.
3.2 Techniques of Inclucating Values in Life
3.2.1 Ashtanga yoga (Yama, Niyama, Asana, Pranayama, Prathyahara, Dhyana,
Dharana and Samadhi)
3.2.2 Shatashtala (Bhakta, Mahesh, Paranalingi, Prasada, Sharana and Aikya)
3.2.3 Eight Fold Path of Budhixm
3.3 Role of Teacher in Value Education.

Unit 4 : Role of Social Agencies in Value Education


4.1 Family
4.2 Religion
4.3 Educational Institutions
4.4 Community
4.5 Mass Media (Print and Electricity)
4.6 Information and Communication Technology (Computer and Internet)

Unit 5 : Value Education in Secondary Schools


5.1 Integrated (Indirect) approach
5.2 Direct (Specialized) Approach
121 
 
5.3 Incidental approach
5.4 Co-curricular and Extra-Curricular Activities.
5.4.1 Resolving Value-Curricular Activities
5.4.2 Discussion of Burning Social and Moral Problem
5.4.3 Project Work and Community Centred Activities.
Assignments(any
one)
1. Visit to religious institutions which are involved in Educational endeavour
2. Documentation of the contributions of the great personalities and institutions for the
promotion and protection of values.
3. Selection of incidences/episodes from the biographies depicting particular/selected
Value.
4. Preparation of Value Judgment Scale.

Note : The college is free to introduce any related practicum / fieldwork activities on relevant unit or sub­unit 
 
                                                                  Evaluation Procedure   
Sessional work & Two tests                       20 Marks
External Evaluation                       80 Marks

Reference:
• Broudly S. Harry (1961) Building a Philosophy of Education, USA, Prentice-hall Inc.
• Dewey, J. (1916) Democracy and Education, New York: Macmillan.
• Doyle, T.F. (1973) Educational Judgments. London: Roufledge and Kegam Paul.
• Feather T. Norman (1975) Values in Education and Society, New York: A Division of Macmillan
Publishing Co.
• Gupta, N.L. (1986) Value – education: Theory and Practice, Amjeer, Krishna brothers.
• Kneller, G.F. (1971) Introduction to the Philosophy of Education, New York: Johnwilly and Sons.
• Lowenthal, F. and Vandamme F. Eds. (1986) Pragmatics and Education, New York, Planeum.
• Marlow A.H., Ed. (1959) New Knowledge in Human Values, London: Harper and Row.
• Peters R.S. (1963) Authority, Responsibility and Education, London: George Allen and Unwin.
• Rogers. C.R. (1980) A way of Being, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.
• Russell, B. (1972) Education and the Good Life, New York: Leveright.
• Venkataiah N. (Ed), (1998) Value Education, New Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

122 
 
                 KARNATAK UNIVERSITY, DHARWAD                       No: XXXXXX 
KARNATAKA, INDIA – 580 003 
STATEMENT OF MARKS                                            
EXAMINATION OF MAY/JUN – 2017 
    BACHELOR OF EDUCATION ‐ III SEMESTER    (CBCS) 
MODEL 
NAME :                                                                                                                                                                                                                           SEAT NO : XXXXXXXX
FATHER NAME :                                                                                                                                                                                       MOTHER NAME :
NAME OF THE COLLEGE : 
SUBJEC CODES  SUBJECT NAME  THEORY/PRACTICAL IA TOTAL CREDIT  SEM  CREDIT  GRADE 
1  2  MAX MIN OBT MAX OBT  MAX  MIN OBT HRS  GRADE  POINTS  14 
3  4  5  6  7  8  9  10  11  POINTS  13   
12 
S3 COURSE  13  GENDER SCHOOL AND SOCIETY   80 32 20 100  40 4
S3 COURSE  14  CREATING AN INCLUSIVE SCHOOL  80  32  20  100  40  4     
S3 COURSE  15  CRITICAL UNDERSTANDING   ICT  80  32  20  100  40  4     
S3 COURSE  16  KNOWLEDGE AND CURRICULUM‐II  80  32  20  100  40  4 
S3 COURSE  17  CONTEMPORARY INDIA AND EDUCATION  80  32  20  100  40  4 
S3 COURSE  18  OPEN ELECTIVE COURSE SUBJECT (ANYONE)  80  32  20  100  40  4 
   

Total                                                                                                                                                                                500       250                        24   

In Words   
Semester GPA :                                                          Result                                       Grade   

Column No.12 = (Column 10)/10, Column 11 = Total Credit Hours For Each Subject.    Column No.13 = (Column 12)* (Column 11) 
G.P.A = Total Value Of Column 13/ Total Value Of Column 11 
E.W.F= Engagement With Field  
 
 
DATE : ___________ 
PLACE:___________ 

REGISTRAR (EVALUATION) 

123 
 
 
 
 
SEMESTER ­ 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
124 
 
Karnatak University, Dharwad 
Bachelor of Education (B.Ed) course 
Semester –IV 
Course EPC: 3 Understanding the Self 
 

This part of the course will be carried out as a part of the 'in-school' practice (internship in school); a
mentor teacher, and supervising course instructor - when available - will guide and debrief the student
teacher on a periodic basis.

Learning Outcomes:After completion of the course, student-teachers will be able to:-


1. To develop understanding of student- teachers about themselves- the development of the self as a person
and as a teacher, through a workshop mode by more than one resource persons.
2. To address aspects of development of the inner self and the professional identity of a teacher.
3. To develop sensibilities, dispositions and skills that will later help them in facilitating the personal
growth of their own students while they teach.
4. To develop social relational sensitivity and effective communication skills, including the ability to listen
and observe.
5. To develop a holistic and integrated understanding of the human self and personality to build resilience
within one self to deal with conflicts at different levels and learn to create teams to draw upon collective
strengths.
6. To make awareness in student teacher of their identities and the political, historical and social forces that
shape them.
7. To help explore one’s dreams, aspiration,concerns, through varied forms of self – expression, including
poetry and humour, creative movement, aesthete representations,etc.
8. To introduce yoga to enhance abilities of body and mind and promote sensibilities that help to give in
peace and harmony with one’s surrounding.

Activities I –
1. Conduct seven days’ workshop in school for personality development on ChetnaVikasMulyaShiksha,
after attending seven days’ shivir of CVMS.
2. Organise an orientation program to address one’s different identities- gender, religion, culture – and it is
important to address one’s implicit beliefs, stereotypes and prejudices resulting from these identities.

Activities II –
1. Organise yoga and meditation Classes at least for two months in a school.
2. Prepare a report after analyzing the effect of the program on body, mind and concentration.

Activities III –
1. Prepare a Performa for cumulative records of students.
2. Make a record of students through the narration of their life stories and group interactions.

Activities IV –
1. Case studies/ biographies/ stories/watching movie/documentary of different children, who are raised in
different circumstances and how their circumstances affected their sense of self and identity formation.
2. Make a detailed report on entire activity and its result.

Activities V –
1. Prepare and maintain a reflective journal by trainees.in which he/she records one’s experiences,
observations and reflections of overall work done in the aforementioned four activities.  
 
 

 
125 
 
              KARNATAK UNIVERSITY, DHARWAD                       No: XXXXXX 
KARNATAKA, INDIA – 580 003 
STATEMENT OF MARKS 
EXAMINATION OF DEC – 2017/ JAN 2018 
    BACHELOR OF EDUCATION ‐ IV SEMESTER    (CBCS) 
MODEL                                           
NAME :                                                                                                                                                                                                                           SEAT NO : XXXXXXXX
FATHER NAME :                                                                                                                                                                                       MOTHER NAME :
NAME OF THE COLLEGE : 
SUBJEC CODES  SUBJECT NAME  THEORY/PRACTICAL IA TOTAL CREDIT  SEM  CREDIT  GRADE 
1  2  MAX MIN OBT MAX OBT  MAX MIN OBT HRS  GRADE  POINTS  14 
3  4  5  6  7  8  9  10  11  POINTS  13   
12 
     
S4 PRATICUM‐I  SCHOOL  INTERNSHIP ON POSS‐I  ‐‐  ‐‐  150    150  60    6       
S4 PRATICUM‐II  SCHOOL  INTERNSHIP ON POSS‐II  ‐‐  ‐‐  150  150  60  6   
S4 EPC‐III  UNDERSTANDING SELF  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  A/B/C/D/E 
S4 PRATICUM‐III  PRACTICAL EXAMINATION ON POSS‐I  50  20  ‐‐  50  20  2   
S4 PRATICUM‐IV  PRACTICAL EXAMINATION ON POSS‐II  50  20  ‐‐  50  20  2   
S3  EWF    2  SOCIALLY USEFUL PRODUCTIVE WORK   ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  A/B/C/D/E 
S3  EWF    3  PHYSICAL EDUCATION  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  A/B/C/D/E 
S3  EW F   4  CO –CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  ‐‐  A/B/C/D/E 
                
Total                                                                                                                                                                                       400        200                      16    

In Words :  THREE HUNDRED TWENTY ONLY 
Semester GPA :          CGPA                                                Result                                      Grade   A  (FINAL GRADE) 

Note: Column No.12= (Column 10)/10,               Column 11= Total credit hours for each subject.    Column No.13= (Column 12)* (Column 11) 
G.P.A= Total value of Column 13/ Total value of column 11 
C.G.P.A = Total Value Of Semester GPA For All Semesters/ Total Credit Hours 
E.P.C=Enhancing Professional Capacity. 
  SEM I                 SEM II      SEM III  SEM IV    TOTAL 
    CREDIT POINTS                       159                   194.0                  153.2                    160.00                684.4 
    CREDIT HOURS    28  28   20                            16                      96 
    MAXIMUM MARKS               700                      700                     500                         400                   2400 
    OBTAINED MARKS    416      520  383                         320                   1696 
 
PLACE : 
DATE : 
          REGISTRAR (EVALUATION) 

126 
 

You might also like